双运品
(2) Yuganaddhavaggo
一、止观双运论
1. Yuganaddhakathā
双运论释
Yuganaddhakathāvaṇṇanā
1现在,为了显示那具有醍醐精华之功德、在止观双运上的圣道功德,而宣说了以经典为前导的双运论,我将注释其中前所未有的义理。然而,应知:因为法将(舍利弗尊者)在法王(佛陀)仍在世时,便于法王般涅槃的那一年入般涅槃了,所以,这部由法库守护者(阿难尊者)在法王住世时,亲从世尊面前听闻而传述、以“如是我闻”等为开端的经典中,所说的“具寿”,是亲爱语、恭敬语,也是带有恭敬与尊重的称呼,意为“拥有寿命”。“阿难”是那位长老的名字。据说他出生时便给亲族带来了极大的喜悦,因此取名为“阿难”,应当这样理解。所谓“在憍赏弥”,是说在那个名称的城市。因为此城的园林、池塘等处,遍满了高山榕树,故而名为憍赏弥。另有一说:“因为它建在仙人拘赏婆的茅棚不远处。”
1. Idāni maṇḍapeyyaguṇassa ariyamaggassa yuganaddhaguṇaṃ dassentena kathitāya suttantapubbaṅgamāya yuganaddhakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Yasmā pana dhammasenāpati dhammarāje dharamāneyeva dhammarājassa parinibbānasaṃvacchare parinibbuto, tasmā dhammarāje dharamāneyeva dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena desitaṃ idaṃ suttantaṃ tasseva sammukhā sutvā evaṃ me sutantiādimāhāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ garuvacanaṃ sagāravasappatissavacanaṃ, āyumāti attho. Ānandoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. So hi jāyamānoyeva kule ānandaṃ bhusaṃ tuṭṭhiṃ akāsi. Tasmāssa ‘‘ānando’’ti nāmaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Kosambiyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tassa hi nagarassa ārāmapokkharaṇīādīsu tesu tesu ṭhānesu kosambarukkhā ussannā ahesuṃ, tasmā taṃ kosambīti saṅkhaṃ agamāsi. ‘‘Kusambassa isino assamato avidūre māpitattā’’ti eke.
“瞿师罗园”:即由瞿师罗长者所建造的园林。在憍赏弥,有三位长者:瞿师罗长者、鸡长者与波婆梨迦长者。他们三人听说“佛陀已出现于世”,便各自用五百辆车满载布施的物资,前往舍卫城。他们在祇园附近扎下营地,来到导师面前顶礼问讯后,坐在一旁听导师说法,并证得了入流果。随后,他们邀请导师,对以佛陀为首的比丘僧团进行了半个月的大施舍。之后,他们俯卧在世尊脚下,恳请世尊前往他们的地方。世尊说:“居士们,如来乐于空寂之处。”他们知道“世尊已默然应许”,心生欢喜,在对十力世尊作礼之后便离开了。归途中,他们每隔一由旬便为世尊建造住所,依次回到了憍赏弥,然后在各自的园林里投入巨资,为世尊建造寺院。其中,瞿师罗长者所建的名为瞿师罗园,鸡长者所建的名为鸡园,波婆梨迦长者在芒果林中所建的名为波婆梨迦芒果林。这里所说的“在瞿师罗长者建造的园林中”,即是指瞿师罗园。
Ghositārāmeti ghositaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme. Kosambiyañhi tayo seṭṭhino ahesuṃ ghositaseṭṭhi kukkuṭaseṭṭhi pāvārikaseṭṭhīti. Te tayopi ‘‘loke buddho uppanno’’ti sutvā pañcahi pañcahi sakaṭasatehi dānūpakaraṇāni gāhāpetvā sāvatthiṃ gantvā jetavanasamīpe khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā nisinnā satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahitvā satthāraṃ nimantetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa aḍḍhamāsamattaṃ mahādānaṃ datvā bhagavato pādamūle nipajjitvā sakajanapadagamanatthaṃ bhagavantaṃ yācitvā ‘‘suññāgāre kho gahapatayo tathāgatā abhiramantī’’ti bhagavatā vutte ‘‘dinnā no bhagavatā paṭiññā’’ti ñatvā ativiya tuṭṭhā dasabalaṃ vanditvā nikkhantā antarāmagge yojane yojane bhagavato nivāsatthaṃ vihāraṃ kārentā anupubbena kosambiṃ patvā attano attano ārāme mahantaṃ dhanapariccāgaṃ katvā bhagavato vihāre kārāpayiṃsu. Tattha ghositaseṭṭhinā kārito ghositārāmo nāma ahosi, kukkuṭaseṭṭhinā kārito kukkuṭārāmo nāma, pāvārikaseṭṭhinā ambavane kārito pāvārikambavanaṃ nāma. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ghositaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme’’ti.
「贤友比丘们」:在这里,诸佛世尊称呼弟子时,会直接称“比丘们”。而弟子们因为不愿显得与佛陀同等,所以在称呼时会先说“贤友”,再说“比丘们”。当被佛陀呼唤时,比丘僧团会回应“尊者”;当被弟子们呼唤时,则回应“贤友”。
Āvuso bhikkhavoti ettha buddhā bhagavanto sāvake ālapantā ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti ālapanti. Sāvakā pana ‘‘buddhehi sadisā mā homā’’ti ‘‘āvuso’’ti paṭhamaṃ vatvā pacchā ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vadanti. Buddhehi ca ālapite bhikkhusaṅgho ‘‘bhadante’’ti paṭivacanaṃ deti, sāvakehi ālapite ‘‘āvuso’’ti.
「任何一位」:这是一个不定的说法,用以涵盖所有这类的比丘。「在我近前」:即在我身边。「证得阿拉汉果」:是说自己已证得阿拉汉果,这是以中性词来表达成就;或者断句为“证得阿拉汉”,义即自己证得了阿拉汉。或者可视为有省略,完整的文本意是“记说自己已证得阿拉汉”。“由四道”并非指四圣道本身,而是指接下来将分别宣说的四种行道。由此应知:有的阿拉汉的第一圣道是“法掉举先行之道”,有的第一圣道是“止先行之道”,又有的第一圣道是“观先行之道”,还有的第一圣道是“双运先行之道”——如是共有四种行道。「或由其中之一」:即在这四种行道之中,依靠任何一种行道证得阿拉汉果,而记说自己是阿拉汉。例如,纯观阿拉汉以法掉举先行之道证得入流道,剩下的三道也全由纯观成就,因此他证得阿拉汉果即属法掉举先行之道。再如,无论是否曾被法掉举所困扰,凡通过止先行等其余三种行道之一而证得四道的阿拉汉,其证得阿拉汉果便是以相应的那种行道为先行的。因此说“或由其中之一”。
Yo hi kocīti aniyamavacanaṃ. Etena tādisānaṃ sabbabhikkhūnaṃ pariyādānaṃ. Mama santiketi mama samīpe. Arahattappattanti attanā arahattassa pattaṃ. Napuṃsake bhāve siddhavacanaṃ. Arahattaṃ pattanti vā padacchedo, attanā pattaṃ arahattanti attho. Arahattappattaṃ attānanti vā pāṭhaseso. Catūhi maggehīti upari vuccamānehi catūhi paṭipadāmaggehi, na ariyamaggehi. ‘‘Catūhi maggehī’’ti visuñca vuttattā kassaci arahato paṭhamassa ariyamaggassa dhammuddhaccapubbaṅgamo maggo, ekassa ariyamaggassa samathapubbaṅgamo, ekassa vipassanāpubbaṅgamo, ekassa yuganaddhapubbaṅgamoti evaṃ cattāropi paṭipadā maggā hontīti veditabbaṃ. Etesaṃ vā aññatarenāti etesaṃ catunnaṃ paṭipadānaṃ maggānaṃ ekena vā, paṭipadāmaggena arahattappattaṃ byākarotīti attho. Sukkhavipassakassa hi arahato dhammuddhaccapubbaṅgamaṃ sotāpattimaggaṃ patvā sesamaggattayampi suddhavipassanāhiyeva pattassa arahattappatti dhammuddhaccapubbaṅgamamaggā hoti. Dhammuddhaccaviggahaṃ patvā vā appatvā vā samathapubbaṅgamādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ paṭipadānaṃ maggānaṃ ekekassa vasena pattacatumaggassa arahato arahattappatti itaraekekamaggapubbaṅgamā hoti. Tasmā āha – ‘‘etesaṃ vā aññatarenā’’ti.
「修习止先行观」:即先以止为先行、为前导,再修习观——也就是先令定生起,随后修习观。「道生起」:指第一出世间道生起。「他修习、多修习该道」等:对于一个心识刹那即灭的道来说,确实不存在“反复修习”等事,但当为了引生第二道等而继续用功时,便可以称为“修习、多修习该道”。「诸结缚被断除,诸随眠被根除」:直至阿拉汉道,一切结缚被次第断除,一切随眠被彻底消灭。所谓「诸随眠被根除」,是指它们由于永不再生,达到了完全灭尽的状态。
Samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvetīti samathaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ bhāveti, paṭhamaṃ samādhiṃ uppādetvā pacchā vipassanaṃ bhāvetīti attho. Maggo sañjāyatīti paṭhamo lokuttaramaggo nibbattati. So taṃ maggantiādīsu ekacittakkhaṇikassa maggassa āsevanādīni nāma natthi, dutiyamaggādayo pana uppādento tameva maggaṃ ‘‘āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotī’’ti vuccati. Saññojanāni pahīyanti, anusayā byantīhontīti yāva arahattamaggā kamena sabbe saññojanā pahīyanti, anusayā byantīhonti. Anusayā byantīhontīti ca puna anuppattiyā vigatantā hontīti attho.
「再者」:即另有其他理由。「修习观先行止」:以观为前导、为先行,然后修习止。也就是先生起观,之后再修定,这就是它的意思。「修习双运」:即结合止观一起修。在此,不能以同一个心进入等至后,又以同一心去观察诸行。而是,此人入定到什么程度,就同样地观察诸行到什么程度;观察诸行到什么程度,也就入定到什么程度。具体怎样修呢?先进入初禅,出定后观察诸行;观察诸行之后,进入第二禅,出定后观察诸行;观察诸行之后,进入第三禅……乃至进入非想非非想处等至,出定后观察诸行。如此而修,便称为修习止观双运。
Puna caparanti puna ca aparaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāvetīti vipassanaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā samathaṃ bhāveti, paṭhamaṃ vipassanaṃ uppādetvā pacchā samādhiṃ bhāvetīti attho. Yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetīti yuganaddhaṃ katvā bhāveti. Ettha teneva cittena samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā teneva saṅkhāre sammasituṃ na sakkā. Ayaṃ pana yāvatā samāpattiyo samāpajjati, tāvatā saṅkhāre sammasati. Yāvatā saṅkhāre sammasati, tāvatā samāpattiyo samāpajjati. Kathaṃ? Paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjati, tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati. Saṅkhāre sammasitvā dutiyajjhānaṃ samāpajjati, tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati. Saṅkhāre sammasitvā tatiyajjhānaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati. Evaṃ samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāveti nāma.
「心被法掉举所执」:此处,钝根修观者于光明等十种名为观随烦恼、以观随烦恼为依处的法中产生迷乱,由此生起伴随掉举的心。这种掉举即是散乱,称为法掉举。被此法掉举所执取、所歪曲执取、所障碍的心,便称为「法掉举所执的心」。或者,以此法掉举为因,生起了依之而起的渴爱、慢、见,从而被执取的心,也是「法掉举所执的心」。另外,也有「法掉举所执心」这种读法。「贤友,那时存在」:这是通过道与非道的确定,排除该法掉举之后,再度进入观道的时候。所谓「那时的心」,就是在那个时刻进入观道而转起的心。「内住」:进入观道之后,在那个时刻,心在名为内所缘的所缘上安住、确立。「安静」:依此转起而正确地静息下来。「成为一境」:心变得专一。「定」:正确地被安置,很好地确立。
Dhammuddhaccaviggahitaṃ mānasaṃ hotīti ettha mandapaññānaṃ vipassakānaṃ upakkilesavatthuttā vipassanupakkilesasaññitesu obhāsādīsu dasasu dhammesu bhantatāvasena uddhaccasahagatacittuppattiyā vikkhepasaṅkhātaṃ uddhaccaṃ dhammuddhaccaṃ, tena dhammuddhaccena viggahitaṃ virūpaggahitaṃ virodhamāpāditaṃ mānasaṃ cittaṃ dhammuddhaccaviggahitaṃ mānasaṃ hoti, tena vā dhammuddhaccena kāraṇabhūtena tammūlakataṇhāmānadiṭṭhuppattiyā viggahitaṃ mānasaṃ hoti. Dhammuddhaccaviggahitamānasanti vā pāṭho. Hoti so āvuso samayoti iminā maggāmaggavavatthānena taṃ dhammuddhaccaṃ paṭibāhitvā puna vipassanāvīthiṃ paṭipannakālaṃ dasseti. Yaṃ taṃ cittanti yasmiṃ samaye taṃ vipassanāvīthiṃ okkamitvā pavattaṃ cittaṃ. Ajjhattameva santiṭṭhatīti vipassanāvīthiṃ paccotaritvā tasmiṃ samaye gocarajjhattasaṅkhāte ārammaṇe santiṭṭhati patiṭṭhāti. Sannisīdatīti tattheva pavattivasena sammā nisīdati. Ekodi hotīti ekaggaṃ hoti. Samādhiyatīti sammā ādhiyati suṭṭhu ṭhitaṃ hotīti.
1. 经的解说注释
1. Suttantaniddesavaṇṇanā
22. 于彼经的解说中,「于彼处生起的法」:指在那定中生起的心与心所法。「以无常随观之义」等,显示观的分类。「正见道」:即名为正见的道。因为在八支道中,每一支都可以称为道。「习行」:依入流道而行。「修习」:以证得一来道的方式而行。「多作」:以证得不来道和阿拉汉道的方式而行。虽然这三者的状态有所不同,但由于转向等是共通的,故作了相似的解答。
2. Tassa suttantassa niddesakathāya tattha jāte dhammeti tasmiṃ samādhismiṃ jāte cittacetasike dhamme. Aniccato anupassanaṭṭhenātiādinā vipassanāya bhedaṃ dasseti. Sammādiṭṭhi maggoti sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhāto maggo. Aṭṭhasu maggaṅgesu ekekopi hi maggoti vuccati.Āsevatīti sotāpattimaggavasena. Bhāvetīti sakadāgāmimagguppādanena. Bahulīkarotīti anāgāmiarahattamagguppādanena. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ avatthābhedepi sati āvajjanādīnaṃ sādhāraṇattā sadisameva vissajjanaṃ kataṃ.
33. 在光想、舍离、随观的中间省略段落中,无散乱等,以及禅那、等至、遍、随念、不净,还有长入出息等,由于在《无间定智解说》(《无碍解道》1.80–81)中已作阐述,此处便加以省略。其中,“依无散乱”:应理解为依前分的无散乱而把握。不过,在“随观无常的入出息”等唯以观修讲述的四种情况中,当观尚薄弱时,应知那是以前导于观、与观相应的定为助力的强有力之观。
3. Ālokasaññāpaṭinissaggānupassanānaṃ antarāpeyyāle avikkhepādīni ca jhāna samāpattikasiṇānussatiasubhā ca dīghaṃ assāsādīni ca ānantarikasamādhiñāṇaniddese (paṭi. ma. 1.80-81) niddiṭṭhattā saṅkhittāni. Tattha ca avikkhepavasenāti pubbabhāgāvikkhepavasena gahetabbaṃ. Aniccānupassī assāsavasenātiādike suddhavipassanāvasena vuttacatukke pana taruṇavipassanākāle vipassanāsampayuttasamādhipubbaṅgamā balavavipassanā veditabbā.
44. 在“观为前导”的章节中,先以“无常”等不限定所缘的方式说观,后以“色无常”等限定所缘的方式说观。其中,“已生起的”:指由彼观已生起的心法与心所法。“以舍离为所缘”:此处,“舍离”即指涅槃。因为涅槃是从诸行中舍离的、从遍舍的角度来说的,故称为舍离。而观以及与观相应的那些法,由于趣向涅槃、以其倾向而立足于涅槃,故为“以涅槃为立足处”、“以涅槃为所缘”。其实,“立足处”由于被执取,也可称为“所缘”;在立足于涅槃的意义上,它们是以涅槃为所缘的。实际上,在其他经典中,“立足处”亦被称为“所缘”,正如经中所说:“贤友!犹如一座芦舍或草舍,已干燥、枯槁、历经多年,若有人从东方持燃烧的火把前来,火便寻得着落,火便寻得所缘”等等。因此,由彼已生起之法,以舍离为所缘、以立足于涅槃为因,所引发的心一境性——即称为近行与安止的无散乱——即为定。这便是在观之后生起的抉择分定,此处已然阐明。正因如此,才说“先观后止”。
4. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamavāre paṭhamaṃ aniccatotiādinā ārammaṇaṃ aniyametvā vipassanā vuttā, pacchā rūpaṃ aniccatotiādinā ārammaṇaṃ niyametvā vuttā. Tattha jātānanti tassā vipassanāya jātānaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Vosaggārammaṇatāti ettha vosaggo nibbānaṃ. Nibbānañhi saṅkhatavosaggato pariccāgato ‘‘vosaggo’’ti vutto. Vipassanā ca taṃsampayuttadhammā ca nibbānaninnatāya ajjhāsayavasena nibbāne patiṭṭhitattā nibbānapatiṭṭhā nibbānārammaṇā. Patiṭṭhāpi hi ālambīyatīti ārammaṇaṃ nāma hoti, nibbāne patiṭṭhaṭṭheneva nibbānārammaṇā. Aññattha pāḷiyampi hi patiṭṭhā ‘‘ārammaṇa’’nti vuccanti. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, āvuso, naḷāgāraṃ vā tiṇāgāraṃ vā sukkhaṃ koḷāpaṃ terovassikaṃ puratthimāya cepi disāya puriso ādittāya tiṇukkāya upasaṅkameyya, labhetha aggi otāraṃ, labhetha aggi ārammaṇa’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 4.243). Tasmā tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ vosaggārammaṇatāya nibbānapatiṭṭhābhāvena hetubhūtena uppādito yo cittassa ekaggatāsaṅkhāto upacārappanābhedo avikkhepo, so samādhīti vipassanāto pacchā uppādito nibbedhabhāgiyo samādhi niddiṭṭho hoti. Tasmāyeva hi iti paṭhamaṃ vipassanā, pacchā samathoti vuttaṃ.
55. 在“双连”的解说中,由于在之前的经疏中所说的双连次第,已借由前两种解说方式而明了,而道刹那的双连次第却不明了,因此,他未说前分中非必定如此的双连修习,而是直接开示道刹那中必然证得的双连修习,故说“以十六种行相”等。其中,在“所缘义”等十七种行相中,最后所说的“双连义”因与根本句意义相同,故将其舍去,依其余诸义而说为“十六种”。“所缘义”:即所缘取之含义,意为依止于所缘。余者亦同此理。“行境义”:虽亦有所缘之义,但侧重于应所依止之处这一意义。“断义”:即断除之义。“舍离义”:虽亦是断除,但以不复执取而彻底舍弃为其意义。“出起义”:即向上超出之义。“翻转义”:虽亦是向上超出,但以不复回转、退堕而还为其意义。“寂静义”:即寂灭之义。“胜妙义”:虽亦是寂灭,但以最为殊胜,或以无有热恼为其意义。“解脱义”:即摆脱束缚之义。“无漏义”:虽亦是摆脱束缚,但以远离了依所缘而生的诸漏为其意义。“度越义”:以不沉没而济渡,或以超越为其意义。“无相义”:以远离诸行之相为其意义。“无愿义”:以远离愿求为其意义。
5. Yuganaddhaniddese yasmā heṭṭhā suttantavaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto yuganaddhakkamo purimadvayaniddesanayeneva pākaṭo, maggakkhaṇe yuganaddhakkamo pana na pākaṭo, tasmā pubbabhāge anekantikaṃ yuganaddhabhāvanaṃ avatvā maggakkhaṇe ekantena labbhamānayuganaddhabhāvanameva dassento soḷasahi ākārehītiādimāha. Tattha ārammaṇaṭṭhenātiādīsu sattarasasu ākāresu ante uddiṭṭhaṃ yuganaddhaṃ mūlapadena ekaṭṭhattā taṃ vippahāya sesānaṃ vasena ‘‘soḷasahī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇaṭṭhenāti ālambanaṭṭhena, ārammaṇavasenāti attho. Evaṃ sesesupi. Gocaraṭṭhenāti ārammaṇaṭṭhepi sati nissayitabbaṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Pahānaṭṭhenāti pajahanaṭṭhena. Pariccāgaṭṭhenāti pahānepi sati puna anādiyanena pariccāgaṭṭhena. Vuṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti uggamanaṭṭhena. Vivaṭṭanaṭṭhenāti uggamanepi sati apunarāvaṭṭanena nivattanaṭṭhena. Santaṭṭhenāti nibbutaṭṭhena. Paṇītaṭṭhenāti nibbutaṭṭhepi sati uttamaṭṭhena, atappakaṭṭhena vā. Vimuttaṭṭhenāti bandhanāpagataṭṭhena. Anāsavaṭṭhenāti bandhanamokkhepi sati ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānāsavavirahitaṭṭhena. Taraṇaṭṭhenāti anosīditvā pilavanaṭṭhena, atikkamanaṭṭhena vā. Animittaṭṭhenāti saṅkhāranimittavirahitaṭṭhena. Appaṇihitaṭṭhenāti paṇidhivirahitaṭṭhena. Suññataṭṭhenāti abhinivesavirahitaṭṭhena. Ekarasaṭṭhenāti ekakiccaṭṭhena. Anativattanaṭṭhenāti aññamaññaṃ anatikkamanaṭṭhena. Yuganaddhaṭṭhenāti yugalakaṭṭhena.
「断掉举者,断无明者」:这是就瑜伽行者断除各自对立法的角度而说。这里的「灭」即指涅槃。「彼此不超越」:若止超越观,因止属沉滞分,心便趋于懈怠;若观超越止,因观属掉举分,心便趋于掉举。因此,止不超越观,心就不陷于懈怠;观不超越止,心就不陷于掉举。当止在平衡中运作时,能护持观不落入掉举;当观在平衡中运作时,能护持止不落入懈怠。如此,二者因彼此不超越的作用而成为同一作用,在平衡中彼此不超越,便成就义利。在道刹那中,它们具双连性;在导向出起的观刹那中,也就是这种双连性。因断除、舍离、出起、翻转的造作是依道的作用而说,为显示完整的道用,故将伴随掉举的烦恼与蕴,以及伴随无明的烦恼与蕴,一并例举。对其余行相则不作此说,因此这里仅为显示对立法而单举掉举与无明。「翻转」:指正在回转而出离的人。
Uddhaccaṃ pajahato, avijjaṃ pajahatoti yogino tassa tassa paṭipakkhappahānavasena vuttaṃ. Nirodho cettha nibbānameva. Aññamaññaṃ nātivattantīti samatho ce vipassanaṃ ativatteyya, līnapakkhikattā samathassa cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya. Vipassanā ce samathaṃ ativatteyya, uddhaccapakkhikattā vipassanāya cittaṃ uddhaccāya saṃvatteyya. Tasmā samatho ca vipassanaṃ anativattamāno kosajjapātaṃ na karoti, vipassanā samathaṃ anativattamānā uddhaccapātaṃ na karoti. Samatho samaṃ pavattamāno vipassanaṃ uddhaccapātato rakkhati, vipassanā samaṃ pavattamānā samathaṃ kosajjapātato rakkhati. Evamime ubho aññamaññaṃ anativattanakiccena ekakiccā, samā hutvā pavattamānena aññamaññaṃ anativattamānā atthasiddhikarā honti. Tesaṃ maggakkhaṇe yuganaddhattaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanākkhaṇe yuganaddhattāyeva hoti. Pahānapariccāgavuṭṭhānavivaṭṭanakaraṇānaṃ maggakiccavasena vuttattā sakalassa maggakiccassa dassanatthaṃ uddhaccasahagatakilesā ca khandhā ca avijjāsahagatakilesā ca khandhā ca niddiṭṭhā. Sesānaṃ na tathā vuttattā paṭipakkhadhammamattadassanavasena uddhaccāvijjā eva niddiṭṭhā. Vivaṭṭatoti nivattantassa.
「定从欲漏解脱」:这是就定作为欲贪对立法而说的。「贪离染」:因为具有对贪的离染与超越,所以称为贪离染;或也可理解为「从贪离染」的从格用法。同样地,「无明离染」也是如此。「心解脱」:指与道相应的定。「慧解脱」:指与道相应的慧。「度越」:指正在度越的人。「从一切愿求」:即从贪、嗔、痴的愿求中出离,或者说从一切渴望中出离。如此解答了十四种行相之后,不再对一味义和彼此不超越义另作分别,而说「以这十六种行相」。为什么这样?因为在十四种行相的每一相末尾,都已说明「它们是同一味、是双运、彼此不超越」,所以那两种行相实际上也已解说完毕。因此说「十六」。不过,双运之义在最初的标举中并未明确说出。
Samādhi kāmāsavā vimutto hotīti samādhissa kāmacchandapaṭipakkhattā vuttaṃ. Rāgavirāgāti rāgassa virāgo samatikkamo etissā atthīti rāgavirāgā, ‘‘rāgavirāgato’’ti nissakkavacanaṃ vā. Tathā avijjāvirāgā. Cetovimuttīti maggasampayutto samādhi. Paññāvimuttīti maggasampayuttā paññā. Taratoti tarantassa. Sabbapaṇidhīhīti rāgadosamohapaṇidhīhi, sabbapatthanāhi vā. Evaṃ cuddasa ākāre vissajjitvā ekarasaṭṭhañca anativattanaṭṭhañca avibhajitvāva imehi soḷasahi ākārehīti āha. Kasmā? Tesaṃ cuddasannaṃ ākārānaṃ ekekassa avasāne ‘‘ekarasā honti, yuganaddhā honti, aññamaññaṃ nātivattantī’’ti niddiṭṭhattā te dvepi ākārā niddiṭṭhāva honti. Tasmā ‘‘soḷasahī’’ti āha. Yuganaddhaṭṭho pana uddesepi na bhaṇitoyevāti.
8. 法掉举章的解说注释
2. Dhammuddhaccavāraniddesavaṇṇanā
6在法掉举章中,「作意无常者,光明生起」:一位住于生灭随观的修行者,以无常、苦、无我三种随观再三观察诸行,当观智成熟时,以彼分断除烦恼而心得清净,在作意无常、或苦、或无我的刹那,借助观智之力,自然便有光明生起。这里首先说明作意无常的人光明如何生起。不善巧的观行者,当这种光明出现时,心想:『啊!我从前从未生起过这样的光明,我一定是证得道了,一定是证得果了。』于是执非道为道,执非果为果。当他如此执非道为道、执非果为果时,观行路线便被中断。他舍弃了自己的观行过程,或者陷入散乱,或者依爱、见、慢而取著那光明,便滞止安住下来。然而,这种光明在不同的比丘那里,范围并不相同:对有些比丘,它只照亮结跏趺座的范围;对有些比丘,照亮屋内;对有些比丘,照亮屋外;对有些比丘,照亮整座寺院;乃至一牛吼地、半由旬、一由旬、二由旬……甚至对某些比丘,光从地面一直延展到阿迦尼吒梵天界,令上下遍成光明。而世尊的光明,则能遍照一万个世界。
6. Dhammuddhaccavāre aniccato manasikaroto obhāso uppajjatīti udayabbayānupassanāya ṭhitassa tīhi anupassanāhi punappunaṃ saṅkhāre vipassantassa vipassantassa vipassanāñāṇesu paripākagatesu tadaṅgavasena kilesappahānena parisuddhacittassa aniccato vā dukkhato vā anattato vā manasikārakkhaṇe vipassanāñāṇānubhāvena pakatiyāva obhāso uppajjatīti paṭhamaṃ tāva aniccato manasikaroto obhāso kathito. Akusalo vipassako tasmiṃ obhāse uppanne ‘‘na ca vata me ito pubbe evarūpo obhāso uppannapubbo, addhā maggaṃ pattomhi, phalaṃ pattomhī’’ti amaggaṃyeva ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalameva ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhāti. Tassa amaggaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalaṃ ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhato vipassanāvīthi ukkantā hoti. So attano vipassanāvīthiṃ vissajjetvā vikkhepamāpanno vā obhāsameva taṇhādiṭṭhimaññanāhi maññamāno vā nisīdati. So kho panāyaṃ obhāso kassaci bhikkhuno pallaṅkaṭṭhānamattameva obhāsento uppajjati, kassaci antogabbhaṃ, kassaci bahigabbhampi, kassaci sakalavihāraṃ, gāvutaṃ aḍḍhayojanaṃ yojanaṃ dviyojanaṃ…pe… kassaci pathavitalato yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā ekālokaṃ kurumāno. Bhagavato pana dasasahassilokadhātuṃ obhāsento udapādi. Ayañhi obhāso caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ obhāsento uppajjati.
「光明是法」:是指将光明作意为法——将现起的种种光明,思惟为“这光明是道法”或“这光明是果法”。由此而生的散乱,就是「掉举」;也就是说,从“光明是法”的作意,或从这一作意本身所生的散乱,即名为掉举。「其心被法掉举所扰乱」:指他的心被如此生起的掉举所扰乱;或者,由于这种掉举为根本因,而生起种种以掉举为根源的烦恼,他的心便为这些烦恼所扰乱。这位观行者虽入于观修,但因滞留在散乱之中,或滞留在以掉举为根源的烦恼之中,便不能如实了知诸行呈现为无常、苦、无我。应当这样来连接‘iti’一词:因而称为“其心被法掉举所扰乱”。「有这样的时刻」:若此瑜伽行者,即使其心因贪著乐味而受染污,只要他能生起审细的审察,便会如此了知:‘所谓观,是以诸行为所缘;道与果,是以涅槃为所缘。而这些心是以诸行为所缘,故此光明决非是道。唯有生灭随观,才是通向涅槃的世间道。’如是辨明道与非道之后,他避开彼散乱,稳固地安住于生灭随观,善巧地观察诸行为无常、苦、无我。对于这样审察的人,
Obhāso dhammoti obhāsaṃ āvajjatīti ayaṃ obhāso maggadhammo phaladhammoti vā taṃ taṃ obhāsaṃ manasi karoti. Tato vikkhepo uddhaccanti tato obhāsato dhammoti āvajjanakaraṇato vā yo uppajjati vikkhepo, so uddhaccaṃ nāmāti attho. Tena uddhaccena viggahitamānasoti tena evaṃ uppajjamānena uddhaccena virodhitacitto, tena vā uddhaccena kāraṇabhūtena tammūlakakilesuppattiyā virodhitacitto vipassako vipassanāvīthiṃ okkamitvā vikkhepaṃ vā tammūlakakilesesu vā ṭhitattā aniccato dukkhato anattato upaṭṭhānāni yathābhūtaṃ nappajānāti. ‘‘Tena vuccati dhammuddhaccaviggahitamānaso’’ti evaṃ iti-saddo yojetabbo. Hoti so samayoti evaṃ assādavasena upakkiliṭṭhacittassāpi yogino sace upaparikkhā uppajjati, so evaṃ pajānāti – ‘‘vipassanā nāma saṅkhārārammaṇā, maggaphalāni nibbānārammaṇāni, imāni ca cittāni saṅkhārārammaṇāni, tasmā nāyamobhāso maggo, udayabbayānupassanāyeva nibbānassa lokiko maggo’’ti maggāmaggaṃ vavatthapetvā taṃ vikkhepaṃ parivajjayitvā udayabbayānupassanāya ṭhatvā sādhukaṃ saṅkhāre aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassati. Evaṃ upaparikkhantassa so samayo hoti. Evaṃ apassanto pana ‘‘maggaphalappattomhī’’ti adhimāniko hoti.
「彼之心」:指那观行之心。「唯内」:唯在于无常随观的所缘——诸行行境之内。论中说:「智生起」:当瑜伽行者推度、审察色法与非色法时,犹如帝释所放之霹雳,不可阻挡、锐利迅猛且极为清净的观智便生起。「喜生起」:彼时,与此观相应的五种喜——小喜、刹那喜、继起喜、踊跃喜、遍满喜,遍满全身而生起。「轻安生起」:彼时,他的身心远离不安、沉重、僵硬、不适业、病态与扭曲;反之,身心变得轻安、轻快、柔软、适业、练达、极清净而且正直。他依着这些轻安等素质的滋养,于彼时体验到名为‘非人喜乐’之乐。对此,有偈颂说:
Yaṃ taṃ cittanti yaṃ taṃ vipassanācittaṃ. Ajjhattamevāti aniccānupassanāya ārammaṇe gocarajjhatteyeva. Ñāṇaṃ uppajjatīti tasseva yogāvacarassa rūpārūpadhamme tulayantassa tīrayantassa vissaṭṭhaindavajiramiva avihatavegaṃ tikhiṇaṃ sūramativisadaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Pīti uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye khuddikā pīti, khaṇikā pīti, okkantikā pīti, ubbegā pīti, pharaṇā pītīti ayaṃ pañcavidhā vipassanāsampayuttā pīti sakalasarīraṃ pūrayamānā uppajjati. Passaddhi uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye kāyacittānaṃ neva daratho, na gāravatā, na kakkhaḷatā , na akammaññatā, na gelaññatā, na vaṅkatā hoti. Atha kho panassa kāyacittāni passaddhāni lahūni mudūni kammaññāni paguṇāni suvisadāni ujukāniyeva honti. So imehi passaddhādīhi anuggahitakāyacitto tasmiṃ samaye amānusiṃ nāma ratiṃ anubhavati. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
居于空寂处,其心寂静之比丘,
正确观照诸法者,享有非人之喜乐。
无论何时,以正念观察诸蕴之生灭,
便获得喜与欢悦,此即知者之不灭(涅槃)。
‘‘Suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa, santacittassa bhikkhuno; Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato. ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 373-4) –
当他如此成就这种非凡的喜悦时,与观相应且伴有轻快等因缘的身轻安与心轻安便生起。“乐生起”:指在那一刻,与观相应的乐,洋溢全身而生起。“胜解生起”:指在那一刻,作为心与心所殊胜净信之体的信根,与观相应而生起。“策励生起”:指在那一刻,不过缓、不过急,极善策励的精进根,与观相应而生起。“现起生起”:指在那一刻,极善现前、极善安住,如同深埋地下般不可动摇,又如喜马拉雅山王般的念根,与观相应而生起。不论他转向、注意、作意、省察什么所缘,那个所缘都如同天眼所见的他世一般,透过念而呈现在他面前。
Evamassa imaṃ amānusiṃ ratiṃ sādhayamānā lahutādīhi sahitā vipassanāsampayuttā kāyacittapassaddhi uppajjati. Sukhaṃ uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye sakalasarīraṃ abhisandayamānaṃ vipassanāsampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ uppajjati. Adhimokkho uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye cittacetasikānaṃ atisayapasādabhūtā vipassanāsampayuttā saddhā uppajjati. Paggaho uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye asithilamanaccāraddhaṃ supaggahitaṃ vipassanāsampayuttaṃ vīriyaṃ uppajjati. Upaṭṭhānaṃ uppajjatīti tasseva tasmiṃ samaye sūpaṭṭhitā suppatiṭṭhitā nikhātā acalā pabbatarājasadisā vipassanāsampayuttā sati uppajjati. So yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjati samannāharati manasi karoti paccavekkhati, taṃ taṃ ṭhānamassa okkantitvā pakkhanditvā dibbacakkhuno paraloko viya satiyā upaṭṭhāti (visuddhi. 2.734).
“舍”:指观舍与转向舍。因为在那一刻,于一切诸行中处于中舍的观舍会强有力地生起,意门中的转向舍也会强有力地生起。对于正在一一转向所缘的他而言,那转向舍就像帝释天掷出的霹雳,又如射入叶鞘的箭,变得迅捷、锐利而运作。以上是《清净道论》中所说。在此,有些导师将“与观相应的彼处中舍性”称为观舍。因为在说“智生起”时,已提及观智,若再另提观舍,便会有重复的过失。而且,在第三禅那的解释中也提到:“行舍与观舍在意义上实为一体,即是慧,仅依作用而分为二。”因此,说为“与观相应的彼处中舍性”,既无重复之失,也与第三禅那的解释相符。再者,在五根中,已用“智、胜解、策励、现起”指出了慧根、信根、精进根、念根,而定根尚未被指出,而依照双运的方式,定根又是必须被指出的。因而应知,此处的“舍”,是指已证得平等安住之定,因其具有舍弃再度安立之作用的功能,故如此说。
Upekkhāti vipassanupekkhā ceva āvajjanupekkhā ca. Tasmiñhi samaye sabbasaṅkhāresu majjhattabhūtā vipassanupekkhāpi balavatī uppajjati, manodvāre āvajjanupekkhāpi. Sā hissa taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjantassa vissaṭṭhaindavajiramiva pattapuṭe pakkhandatattanārāco viya ca sūrā tikhiṇā hutvā vahati . Evañhi visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.734) vuttaṃ. Vipassanupekkhāti cettha ‘‘vipassanāsampayuttā tatramajjhattupekkhā’’ti ācariyā vadanti. Vipassanāñāṇe hi gayhamāne ‘‘ñāṇaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vipassanāñāṇassa āgatattā punaruttidoso hoti. Tatiyajjhānavaṇṇanāyañca ‘‘saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhānampi atthato ekībhāvo. Paññā eva hi sā, kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā vipassanāsampayuttāya tatramajjhattupekkhāya vuccamānāya punaruttidoso ca na hoti, tatiyajjhānavaṇṇanāya ca sameti. Yasmā ca pañcasu indriyesu ‘‘ñāṇaṃ adhimokkho paggaho upaṭṭhāna’’nti paññindriyasaddhindriyavīriyindriyasatindriyāni niddiṭṭhāni, samādhindriyaṃ pana aniddiṭṭhaṃ hoti, yuganaddhavasenāpi ca samādhindriyaṃ niddisitabbameva hoti, tasmā samappavatto samādhi puna samādhāne byāpārappahānakaraṇena ‘‘upekkhā’’ti vuttoti veditabbaṃ.
「爱欲生起」:这是指对如此被光明等所庄严的观,生起执著,一种微妙、寂静的爱欲生起,这种爱欲就是烦恼,甚至难以被察觉。如同在光明生起时一样,在这些情境中不论哪一种生起,那位瑜伽行者如果这样想:‘啊,我从前从未生起过这样的智,从未生起过这样的喜、轻安、乐、胜解、策励、现起、舍、爱欲。我肯定已经证得道,已经证得果了。’他就将不是道的执取为‘道’,将不是果的执取为‘果’。当他这样执取时,他的观行之路就中断了。他放弃了自己的根本业处,只是坐在那里沉湎于那种爱欲。在这里,光明等因为是随染的所依事,所以被称为‘随染’,并不是因为它们本身是不善的。而爱欲既是随染,也是随染的所依事。这些随染,依所依事来说只有十种,但依执取的方式,则有三十种。怎么会有三十种呢?如果执取‘我的光明生起了’,就生起了见执;如果执取‘这光明真可爱啊’,就生起了慢执;如果对光明产生味著,就生起了爱执。这样,对于光明,因为见、慢、爱而有三种执取。对于其余的也这样类推。因此,依执取的方式,共有三十种随染。在‘当他作意苦时’、‘当他作意无我时’等各段落中,也应该用这个道理来理解其含义。在这里应知:每一种随观的随染,是对于每一种观各别生起的,并非只对一个人生起。
Nikantiuppajjatīti evaṃ obhāsādipaṭimaṇḍitāya vipassanāya ālayaṃ kurumānā sukhumā santākārā nikanti uppajjati, yā kilesoti pariggahetumpi na sakkā hoti. Yathā ca obhāse, evaṃ etesupi aññatarasmiṃ uppanne yogāvacaro ‘‘na ca vata me ito pubbe evarūpaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppannapubbaṃ, evarūpā pīti passaddhi sukhaṃ adhimokkho paggaho upaṭṭhānaṃ upekkhā nikanti uppannapubbā, addhā maggaṃ pattomhi, phalaṃ pattomhī’’ti amaggameva ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalameva ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhāti. Tassa amaggaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalañca ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhato vipassanāvīthi ukkantā hoti. So attano mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā nikantimeva assādento nisīdati. Ettha ca obhāsādayo upakkilesavatthutāya upakkilesāti vuttā, na akusalattā. Nikanti pana upakkileso ceva upakkilesavatthu ca. Vatthuvaseneva cete dasa, gāhavasena pana samatiṃsa honti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Mama obhāso uppanno’’ti gaṇhato hi diṭṭhiggāho hoti, ‘‘manāpo vata obhāso uppanno’’ti gaṇhato mānaggāho, obhāsaṃ assādayato taṇhāggāho. Iti obhāse diṭṭhimānataṇhāvasena tayo gāhā. Tathā sesesupīti evaṃ gāhavasena samatiṃsa upakkilesā honti. Dukkhato manasikaroto, anattato manasikarototi vāresupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Ekekaanupassanāvasena hettha ekekassa vipassanupakkilesuppatti veditabbā, na ekasseva.
在三种随观中。如此,先以不分别的方式,通过观显示了随染;再以分别的方式显示,便说「当他作意色为无常时」等语句。其中,「老死以无常而呈现」,即老死以无常的方式呈现。
Tīsu anupassanāsu. Evaṃ abhedato vipassanāvasena upakkilese dassetvā puna bhedavasena dassento rūpaṃ aniccato manasikarototiādimāha. Tattha jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccato upaṭṭhānanti jarāmaraṇassa aniccato upaṭṭhānaṃ.
7由于前述的三十种随染,那不善巧、不聪慧的瑜伽行者会对光明等心生动摇,将光明等一一视为「这是我的,我是这个,这是我的我」。因此,为阐明此义,而说出以「对于光明和智」开头的两首偈颂。其中,「动摇」指对于光明等所缘,因种种烦恼而以种种方式摇摆、震动。「那些使心震动的」指由于那些轻安与乐,心因种种烦恼而以种种方式震动、动摇。因此,应知其中关联:瑜伽行者对于轻安与乐也会动摇。「对于舍和转向」,即对于称为舍的转向也会动摇,也就是对转向舍会动摇的意思。在《清净道论》中则说「对于转向舍的」。「对于舍」是指对下面将述的那种舍也会动摇,以及对爱欲也会动摇。此处,由于指出了两种舍,故在下文「舍生起」处也说明了两种含义。在无常随观等中,每一随观都有转向舍存在,因此说每一种随观——无常、无常,苦、苦,无我、无我——被反复修习。然而,那善巧、聪慧、明达、具足智慧的瑜伽行者,当光明等生起时,他即以慧如此决断、审察:「我的这光明确实生起了,但它是无常的、有为的、缘生的、灭尽法、衰灭法、离贪法、」
7. Yasmā pubbe vuttānaṃ samatiṃsāya upakkilesānaṃ vasena akusalo abyatto yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu vikampati, obhāsādīsu ekekaṃ ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti samanupassati, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento obhāse ceva ñāṇe cātiādigāthādvayamāha. Tattha vikampatīti obhāsādike ārammaṇe nānākilesavasena vividhā kampati vedhati. Yehi cittaṃ pavedhatīti yehi passaddhisukhehi cittaṃ nānākilesavasena nānappakārena vedhati kampati. Tasmā passaddhiyā sukhe ceva yogāvacaro vikampatīti sambandho veditabbo. Upekkhāvajjanāya cevāti upekkhāsaṅkhātāya āvajjanāya ceva vikampati, āvajjanupekkhāya ceva vikampatīti attho. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.736) pana ‘‘upekkhāvajjanāyañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Upekkhāya cāti heṭṭhā vuttappakārāya upekkhāya ca vikampati, nikantiyā ca vikampatīti attho. Ettha ca dvinnaṃ upekkhānaṃ niddiṭṭhattā heṭṭhā ‘‘upekkhā uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne ca ubhayathā attho vutto. Aniccānupassanādīsu ca ekekissāyeva āvajjanupekkhāya sabbhāvato ekekāyeva anupassanā aniccaṃ aniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ dukkhaṃ, anattā anattāti punappunaṃ bhāvīyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā pana kusalo paṇḍito byatto buddhisampanno yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu uppannesu ‘‘ayaṃ kho me obhāso uppanno, so kho panāyaṃ anicco saṅkhato paṭiccasamuppanno khayadhammo vayadhammo virāgadhammo nirodhadhammo’’ti iti vā naṃ paññāya paricchindati upaparikkhati. Atha vā panassa evaṃ hoti – sace obhāso attā bhaveyya, ‘‘attā’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭeyya. Anattāva panāyaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahito. Tasmāyaṃ avasavattanaṭṭhena anattāti passanto diṭṭhiṃ ugghāṭeti. Sace obhāso nicco bhaveyya, ‘‘nicco’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭeyya. Aniccova panāyaṃ ‘‘nicco’’ti gahito. Tasmāyaṃ hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccoti passanto mānaṃ samugghāṭeti. Sace obhāso sukho bhaveyya, ‘‘sukho’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭeyya. Dukkhova panāyaṃ ‘‘sukho’’ti gahito. Tasmāyaṃ uppādavayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhoti passanto nikantiṃ pariyādiyati. Yathā ca obhāse, evaṃ sesesupi.
如此审察之后,他便将光明视为「这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我」。对于智……乃至爱欲,也同样视为「这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我」。当他这样观照时,对于光明等便不再动摇、震动。因此,为说明此义,而说出「此十种处」的偈颂。其中,「十种处」即指光明等。「以慧熟悉」:指某人以脱离了随染的慧,反复接触、修习,对它们极为熟悉。「善巧于法掉举」:那位以慧熟悉十种处的瑜伽行者,因如实通达前文所说的法掉举,便成为善巧者。「且不走向迷乱」:正因善巧于法掉举,他以摧破爱、慢、见的方式,不再走向迷乱。
Evaṃ upaparikkhitvā obhāsaṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti samanupassati. Ñāṇaṃ…pe… nikantiṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti samanupassati. Evaṃ samanupassanto obhāsādīsu na kampati na vedhati. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento imāni dasa ṭhānānīti gāthamāha. Tattha dasa ṭhānānīti obhāsādīni. Paññā yassa pariccitāti yassa upakkilesavimuttāya paññāya paricitāni punappunaṃ phuṭṭhāni paribhāvitāni. Dhammuddhaccakusalo hotīti so paññāya paricitadasaṭṭhāno yogāvacaro pubbe vuttappakārassa dhammuddhaccassa yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhena cheko hoti. Na ca sammoha gacchatīti dhammuddhaccakusalattāyeva taṇhāmānadiṭṭhugghāṭavasena sammohañca na gacchati.
现在,为以另一种方式阐明前文已说之理,而宣说“既掉举又染污”等偈颂。此处,钝慧的瑜伽行者于光明等境界中,既陷掉举,亦生起其余烦恼。中慧者唯陷掉举,不生其余烦恼,彼成增上慢者。利慧者虽陷掉举,亦能舍离彼增上慢而着手修观。极利慧者既不陷掉举,亦不生其余烦恼。“既掉举又染污”:他们之中,钝慧者陷入名为“法掉举”的掉举,同时被染污,即为渴爱、慢、见等烦恼所染污,意指他遭受折磨、被逼迫与损害。“心修习退堕”:彼钝慧者修观之心,因停滞于烦恼、为对立面所坏而退堕,意即崩溃、无法安住。“掉举而不染污”:中慧者因掉举而陷入掉举之状,却不被烦恼染污。“修习衰退”:彼中慧者由增上慢故,不着力修观,其观因而衰退,即不复运作。“掉举而不染污”:利慧者亦因掉举而陷入掉举之状,却不被烦恼染污。“修习不衰退”:彼利慧者虽具掉举,却能舍离彼增上慢之掉举,从而具备观之初修,故其观修习不衰退,即能
Idāni pubbe vuttameva vidhiṃ aparena pariyāyena vibhāvetvā dassento vikkhipati ceva kilissati cātiādigāthamāha. Tattha mandapañño yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu vikkhepañca avasesakilesuppattiñca pāpuṇāti. Majjhimapañño vikkhepameva pāpuṇāti, nāvasesakilesuppattiṃ, so adhimāniko hoti. Tikkhapañño vikkhepaṃ pāpuṇitvāpi taṃ adhimānaṃ pahāya vipassanaṃ ārabhati. Atitikkhapañño na vikkhepaṃ pāpuṇāti, na cāvasesakilesuppattiṃ. Vikkhippati cevāti tesu mandapañño dhammuddhaccasaṅkhātaṃ vikkhepañceva pāpuṇīyati. Kilissati cāti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhikilesehi kilesīyati ca, upatāpīyati vibādhīyatīti attho. Cavati cittabhāvanāti tassa mandapaññassa vipassanācittabhāvanā kilesesuyeva ṭhānato paṭipakkhāvihatattā cavati, paripatatīti attho. Vikkhipati na kilissatīti majjhimapañño vikkhepena vikkhipati, kilesehi na kilissati. Bhāvanā parihāyatīti tassa majjhimapaññassa adhimānikattā vipassanārambhābhāvena vipassanā parihāyati, nappavattatīti attho. Vikkhipati na kilissatīti tikkhapaññopi vikkhepena vikkhipati, kilesehi na kilissati. Bhāvanā na parihāyatīti tassa tikkhapaññassa santepi vikkhepe taṃ adhimānavikkhepaṃ pahāya vipassanārambhasabbhāvena vipassanābhāvanā na parihāyati, pavattatīti attho. Na ca vikkhipate cittaṃ na kilissatīti atitikkhapaññassa cittaṃ na vikkhepena vikkhipati, na ca kilesehi kilissati. Na cavati cittabhāvanāti tassa vipassanācittabhāvanā na cavati, vikkhepakilesābhāvena yathāṭhāne tiṭṭhatīti attho.
于“以此四种处”等句中,应如此理解其义理的注释与关联:以现今所说此四种处为因,或说为缘,对于光明等十种处,心以“昏沉”与“掉举”二相而受执持。第四种人,即具足善巧与大智慧的瑜伽行者,已远离掉举与烦恼的生起,能如实了知钝慧等前三种瑜伽行者的心所呈现的种种状态。此处所言“昏沉”,当知为心由于掉举与烦恼的生起而陷入低沉、无力的状态。所言“掉举”,则当依“掉举而不染污”那两处中所说之义,知为心成为高扬、散乱之状。
Imehi catūhi ṭhānehītiādīsu idāni vuttehi imehi catūhi ṭhānehi hetubhūtehi, karaṇabhūtehi vā obhāsādike dasa ṭhāne cittassa saṅkhepena ca vikkhepena ca viggahitaṃ mānasaṃ vikkhepakilesuppattivirahito catuttho kusalo mahāpañño yogāvacaro mandapaññādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ yogāvacarānaṃ mānasaṃ evañca evañca hotīti nānappakārato jānātīti sambandhato atthavaṇṇanā veditabbā. Saṅkhepoti cettha vikkhepassa ceva kilesānañca uppattivasena cittassa līnabhāvo veditabbo. Vikkhepoti ‘‘vikkhipati na kilissatī’’ti dvīsu ṭhānesu vuttavikkhepavasena cittassa uddhatabhāvo veditabboti.
对关于谛的解释进行注释
Saccakathāvaṇṇanā
8现在,对这篇以经教为前导、依具足双连功德的圣道而开示‘谛的意义’、‘证悟谛的殊胜’及‘谛相分类’等内容的谛说,作未显明之义的注释。此处先说经教中的内容:‘真如’,是依据如实性而真实不虚。因为就谛的意义而言,那些如实自性的诸法本身就是谛。谛的意义,在最初智解说的注释中已经讲过。‘无虚妄’,是指在所说的自性上全无颠倒错乱,因为谛不会是虚假的。‘无变异’,是指完全没有其他自性,因为虚假的东西不会是谛。经文说:‘比丘们,这是苦。’比丘们,所谓‘这是苦’,因其具有如实性,故为真如——苦就只是苦;因在所说的自性上全无颠倒,故为无虚妄——苦绝不会变成非苦;因完全没有其他自性,故为无变异——苦绝不会有集等其他自性。对于集、灭、道,也是同样的道理。
8. Idāni yuganaddhaguṇassa ariyamaggassa vasena saccaṭṭhaṃ saccapaṭivedhavisesaṃ saccalakkhaṇādividhānañca dassentena kathitāya suttantapubbaṅgamāya saccakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha suttante tāva tathānīti yathāsabhāvavasena tacchāni. Yathāsabhāvabhūtāneva hi dhammajātāni saccaṭṭhena saccāni. Saccaṭṭho paṭhamañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto. Avitathānīti vuttasabhāve vipariyāyavirahitāni. Na hi saccāni asaccāni nāma honti. Anaññathānīti aññasabhāvavirahitāni. Na hi asaccāni saccāni nāma honti. Idaṃ dukkhanti, bhikkhave, tathametanti bhikkhave, idaṃ dukkhanti yaṃ vuccati, etaṃ yathāsabhāvattā tathaṃ. Dukkhameva hi dukkhaṃ. Vuttasabhāve vipariyāyābhāvato avitathaṃ. Na hi dukkhaṃ adukkhaṃ nāma hoti. Aññasabhāvavirahitattā anaññathaṃ. Na hi dukkhaṃ samudayādisabhāvaṃ hoti. Samudayādīsupi eseva nayo.
1. 第一经解说的注释
1. Paṭhamasuttantaniddesavaṇṇanā
‘以真如义’,即是以如实自性之义。至于逼迫等义,在《智论》中已经说过,此处不再复述。
Tathaṭṭhenāti yathāsabhāvaṭṭhena. Pīḷanaṭṭhādayo ñāṇakathāyaṃ vuttatthāyeva.
9‘一贯通达’(ekappaṭivedhānīti):指以一道智通达,或这些(四圣谛)可被一次通达,故称一贯通达。‘以无我义’:因四圣谛皆无自我,故说以无我义。这在《清净道论》中确实有说:‘从究竟义而言,一切圣谛因无感受者、无造作者、无寂灭者、无行者,故应知其为空。’因此说:
9.Ekappaṭivedhānīti ekena maggañāṇena paṭivedho, ekato vā paṭivedho etesanti ekappaṭivedhāni. Anattaṭṭhenāti catunnampi saccānaṃ attavirahitattā anattaṭṭhena. Vuttañhetaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.567) – paramatthato hi sabbāneva saccāni vedakakārakanibbutagamakābhāvato suññānīti veditabbāni. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
有寂灭,而无寂灭者;有道,而无行道者。”(《清净道论》2.567)
‘‘Dukkhameva hi, na koci dukkhito, kārako na, kiriyāva vijjati; Atthi nibbuti, na nibbuto pumā, maggamatthi, gamako na vijjatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.567);
第一、第二谛——苦与集,在常、净、乐、我方面是空的;第三谛——灭,在前二谛(苦与集)上是空的,唯与不死相关;道在常、乐、我方面是空的。因此,于此四谛,各有其空性。
‘‘Dhuvasubhasukhattasuññaṃ, purimadvayamattasuññamamatapadaṃ;
“Saccaṭṭhenāti”:以谛义,即不欺诳的意义,这便是谛的意义。“Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti”:以通达义,指在道刹那应被通达的意义。“Ekasaṅgahitānīti”:被一义所摄,即被如义等每一个意义所摄,也就是进入同一计数的意义。凡是被一个意义所摄的,便称为“单一身”(ekattaṃ);正因为被一个意义所摄,所以即是“单一身”的意义。虽然圣谛有多种,但着眼于单一性而使用单数。所谓“他以一智通达单一性”,是指在加行阶段,如实安立四圣谛的种种单一性而安住其中,然后在道刹那以一道智通达如义等各自的单一性。怎样通达呢?当灭谛的如义等单一性被通达时,其余圣谛的如义等单一性也就同时被通达了。正如在加行阶段,如实安立五蕴的种种单一性而安住的人,在道出起时,若观无常、或苦、或无我而出起,那么当在一个蕴上见到无常等时,其余蕴也必定见到无常等,这个道理应当这样理解。“苦的苦义就是如义”:苦圣谛的逼迫义等四种义,依自性而契入真实,所以称为如义。其余诸谛也是如此。
Dhuvasukhaattavirahito, maggo iti suññatā tesū’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.567);
10. “凡是无常的……”等,是依共相作为前导而显示的。这里,“凡是无常的,那是苦。凡是苦的,那是无常”——这是就苦、集、道三谛而说。因为这三谛既无常,也由于无常而苦。“凡是无常且苦的,那是无我”——这仍然只指这三谛。“凡是无常、苦、无我的”——则连同这三谛以及灭谛也一起被包含。因为四圣谛都是无我。“那是如”:这四圣谛是依自性而真实存在的(bhūta)。“那是谛”:即这四圣谛,如其自性而不欺诳。关于“以九行相”等:依“诸比丘,一切应遍知”这句话,因此以遍知义;苦以遍知义,集以应断义,道以应修习义,灭以应作证义——即使在各自不同的方面,于此四圣谛中,也以遍知义而说,因为四圣谛中都有知遍知;以断义而说,因为见到四圣谛即有断;以修习义而说,因为有四圣谛的修习;以作证义而说,因为有四圣谛的作证。应当这样联系。在“以九行相如义等”中,应按照前面所说的方法进行联系。
Saccaṭṭhenāti avisaṃvādakaṭṭhena. Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti maggakkhaṇe paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭhena. Ekasaṅgahitānīti tathaṭṭhādinā ekekeneva atthena saṅgahitāni, ekagaṇanaṃ gatānīti attho. Yaṃ ekasaṅgahitaṃ, taṃ ekattanti yasmā ekena saṅgahitaṃ, tasmā ekattanti attho. Saccānaṃ bahuttepi ekattamapekkhitvā ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Ekattaṃ ekena ñāṇena paṭivijjhatīti pubbabhāge catunnaṃ saccānaṃ nānattekattaṃ svāvatthitaṃ vavatthapetvā ṭhito maggakkhaṇe ekena maggañāṇena tathaṭṭhāditaṃtaṃekattaṃ paṭivijjhati. Kathaṃ? Nirodhasaccassa tathaṭṭhādike ekatte paṭividdhe sesasaccānampi tathaṭṭhādikaṃ ekattaṃ paṭividdhameva hoti. Yathā pubbabhāge pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ nānattekattaṃ svāvatthitaṃ vavatthapetvā ṭhitassa maggavuṭṭhānakāle aniccato vā dukkhato vā anattato vā vuṭṭhahantassa ekasmimpi khandhe aniccādito diṭṭhe sesakhandhāpi aniccādito diṭṭhāva honti, evamidanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dukkhassa dukkhaṭṭho tathaṭṭhoti dukkhasaccassa pīḷanaṭṭhādiko catubbidho attho sabhāvaṭṭhena tathaṭṭho. Sesasaccesupi eseva nayo. Soyeva catubbidho attho attābhāvato anattaṭṭho. Vuttasabhāve avisaṃvādakato saccaṭṭho. Maggakkhaṇe paṭivijjhitabbato paṭivedhaṭṭho vuttoti veditabbaṃ.
10第十,所谓“无常等”,是以共相为先导而开示的。其中,凡是无常的,就是苦;凡是苦的,就是无常——由此摄取了苦、集、道。因为这三谛既无常,又因无常而是苦。凡是无常与苦的,就是无我——由此同样摄取了这三者。凡是无常、苦、无我的——以此三者连同灭谛一起被包含。因为四谛皆是无我。“这就是如”是指这四谛组是真实自性。“这就是谛”是指这四谛组如其自性而不虚诳。在“以九种行相”等句中,应知:依“诸比丘,一切应证知”之说,以证知义;以遍知义——因苦的遍知义;以断义——因集的断义;以修习义——因道的修习义;以作证义——因灭的作证义;即便各别而言,于此四谛中,因为有知遍知的存在,故以遍知义;因为有见四谛而断的存在,故以断义;因为四谛修习的存在,故以修习义;因为四谛作证的存在,故以作证义而解说。在“以九种行相、以如义等”中,应按最初所说的方法来贯通。
10.Yaṃ aniccantiādi sāmaññalakkhaṇapubbaṅgamaṃ katvā dassitaṃ. Tattha yaṃ aniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ aniccanti dukkhasamudayamaggā gahitā. Tāni hi tīṇi saccāni aniccāni ceva aniccattā dukkhāni ca. Yaṃ aniccañca dukkhañca, taṃ anattāti tāniyeva tīṇi gahitāni. Yaṃ aniccañca dukkhañca anattā cāti tehi tīhi saha nirodhasaccañca saṅgahitaṃ. Cattāripi hi anattāyeva. Taṃ tathanti taṃ saccacatukkaṃ sabhāvabhūtaṃ. Taṃ saccanti tadeva saccacatukkaṃ yathāsabhāve avisaṃvādakaṃ. Navahākārehītiādīsu ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññeyya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.3; saṃ. ni. 4.46) vacanato abhiññaṭṭhena, dukkhassa pariññaṭṭhe, samudayassa pahānaṭṭhe, maggassa bhāvanaṭṭhe, nirodhassa sacchikiriyaṭṭhe āvenikepi idha catūsupi saccesu ñātapariññāsabbhāvato pariññaṭṭhena, catusaccadassanena pahānasabbhāvato pahānaṭṭhena, catusaccabhāvanāsabbhāvato bhāvanaṭṭhena, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ sacchikiriyasabbhāvato sacchikiriyaṭṭhenāti niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Navahākārehi tathaṭṭhenātiādīsu paṭhamaṃ vuttanayeneva yojanā kātabbā.
11在“以十二种行相”等句中,“如义等”的意义是在智论中所说的。在解释这些内容时,也应按前述的方法来理解贯通。
11.Dvādasahi ākārehītiādīsu tathaṭṭhādayo ñāṇakathāyaṃ vuttatthā. Etesaṃ niddesepi vuttanayeneva yojanā veditabbā.
12在“谛有多少种相”等句中,将下文应说的六种相,依有为、无为而分为两类,故说为“二种相”。其中,所谓“有为相”与“无为相”,即如经中所说:“诸比丘,这些是有为的三种有为相:生起可知,灭去可知,住立时的变异可知。诸比丘,这些是无为的三种无为相:生起不可知,灭去不可知,住立时的变异不可知。”(《增支部》3.47-48)如此,这是有为法作为有为的相,以及无为法作为无为的相。然而,有为法不是相,相也不是有为法。没有有为法,就不能说明相;没有相,也不能说明有为法。可是,正是通过相,有为法才得以显现。
12.Saccānaṃ kati lakkhaṇānītiādīsu upari vattabbāni cha lakkhaṇāni saṅkhatāsaṅkhatavasena dvidhā bhinditvā dve lakkhaṇānīti āha. Tattha saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca asaṅkhatalakkhaṇañcāti ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, saṅkhatassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyati. Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, asaṅkhatassa asaṅkhatalakkhaṇāni na uppādo paññāyati, na vayo paññāyati, na ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.47-48) evaṃ vuttaṃ saṅkhatassa saṅkhatamiti lakkhaṇañca asaṅkhatassa asaṅkhatamiti lakkhaṇañca. Saṅkhataṃ pana na lakkhaṇaṃ, lakkhaṇaṃ na saṅkhataṃ. Na ca saṅkhataṃ vinā lakkhaṇaṃ paññāpetuṃ sakkā, napi lakkhaṇaṃ vinā saṅkhataṃ. Lakkhaṇena pana saṅkhataṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti.
再者,为详细开示彼二相,故说「六种相」。「有为诸谛」指苦谛、集谛、道谛。因这些谛皆由因缘和合而成,故为有为。「生起」指生。「了知」指被认知。「灭」指坏灭。「住者之变异性」指已达住立状态者之变异,即老。三种有为谛为已成就者,故可说彼有生、灭、变异性;然生、老、灭本身非已成就者,故对他们不应说生、灭、变异性。但依止于有为法故,不应谓生、灭、变异性不被了知。然因彼是有为之变化,故当名「有为」。有言:苦谛与集谛之生、老、灭属于谛之范畴,道谛之生、老、灭则不属于谛之范畴。于此,《蕴品注释》(《相应部注》2.3.37-38)云:「于生起刹那,既了知有为法,亦了知生相及被称为时间之彼刹那;于生已过去,既了知有为法,亦了知老相及被称为时间之彼刹那;于坏灭刹那,既了知有为法、老,亦了知坏灭相及被称为时间之彼刹那。」「无为谛」指灭谛。灭谛非由因缘和合而成,乃自身本然成就,故为无为。「住者」指因其恒常而住立,非因达到某种住立状态。再者,为详细开示彼
Puna tadeva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ vitthārato dassento cha lakkhaṇānīti āha. Saṅkhatānaṃ saccānanti dukkhasamudayamaggasaccānaṃ. Tāni hi paccayehi saṅgamma katattā saṅkhatāni. Uppādoti jāti. Paññāyatīti jānīyati. Vayoti bhaṅgo. Ṭhitānaṃ aññathattanti ṭhitippattānaṃ aññathābhāvo jarā. Tiṇṇaṃ saṅkhatasaccānaṃ nipphannattā uppādavayaññathattaṃ vuttaṃ, tesaṃyeva pana uppādassa, jarāya bhaṅgassa ca anipphannattā uppādavayaññathattaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Saṅkhatanissitattā uppādavayaññathattaṃ na paññāyatīti na vattabbaṃ. Saṅkhatavikārattā pana saṅkhatanti vattabbaṃ. Dukkhasamudayānaṃ uppādajarābhaṅgā saccapariyāpannā, maggasaccassa uppādajarābhaṅgā na saccapariyāpannāti vadanti. Tattha ‘‘saṅkhatānaṃ uppādakkhaṇe saṅkhatāpi uppādalakkhaṇampi kālasaṅkhāto tassa khaṇopi paññāyati, uppāde vītivatte saṅkhatāpi jarālakkhaṇampi kālasaṅkhāto tassa khaṇopi paññāyati, bhaṅgakkhaṇe saṅkhatāpi jarāpi bhaṅgalakkhaṇampi kālasaṅkhāto tassa khaṇopi paññāyatī’’ti khandhakavaggaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.37-38) vuttaṃ. Asaṅkhatassa saccassāti nirodhasaccassa. Tañhi paccayehi samāgamma akatattā sayameva nipphannanti asaṅkhataṃ. Ṭhitassāti niccattā ṭhitassa, na ṭhānappattattā. Puna tadeva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ vitthārato dassento dvādasa lakkhaṇānīti āha.
于「四谛中,几为善」等问中,「无记」者:于果报无记、唯作无记、色无记、涅槃无记此四种无记中,即涅槃无记。此四种皆不以善或不善之相而被记别,故为无记。「或为善」:依欲界、色界、无色界善法,亦可为善。「或为不善」:除渴爱外,依其余不善法,亦可为不善。「或为无记」:依欲界、色界、无色界之果报与唯作,及色法,亦可为无记。于「三种谛」等句中,「被包含」谓被计入。「依事物而说」谓依如是名为不善、善、无记之苦、灭、道等事物而说。凡苦谛中,除渴爱外,余者即是「不善」。以「不善」之义,有二谛为一谛所包含,言:此苦、集二谛,由「不善」义故,为一谛所包含,即成所谓「不善谛」。「一谛为二谛所包含」者,即一不善谛为苦、集二谛所包含。凡苦谛中,三地所摄之善法,即是「善」。此苦、道二谛,由「善」义故,为一谛所包含,即成所谓「善谛」。一善谛为苦、道二谛所包含。凡苦谛中,三地所摄之果报、唯作及色法,即是「无记」。此苦、灭二谛,由「无记」义故,为一谛所包含,即成所谓「无记
Catunnaṃsaccānaṃ kati kusalātiādīsu abyākatanti vipākābyākataṃ kiriyābyākataṃ rūpābyākataṃ nibbānābyākatanti catūsu abyākatesu nibbānābyākataṃ. Cattāripi hi kusalākusalalakkhaṇena na byākatattā abyākatāni. Siyā kusalanti kāmāvacararūpāvacarārūpāvacarakusalānaṃ vasena kusalampi bhaveyya. Siyā akusalanti taṇhaṃ ṭhapetvā sesākusalavasena. Siyā abyākatanti kāmāvacararūpāvacarārūpāvacaravipākakiriyānaṃ rūpānañca vasena. Siyā tīṇi saccānītiādīsu saṅgahitānīti gaṇitāni. Vatthuvasenāti akusalakusalābyākatadukkhasamudayanirodhamaggasaṅkhātavatthuvasena. Yaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ akusalanti ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ avasesaṃ akusalaṃ. Akusalaṭṭhena dve saccāni ekasaccena saṅgahitānīti imāni dve dukkhasamudayasaccāni akusalaṭṭhena ekasaccena saṅgahitāni, akusalasaccaṃ nāma hotīti attho. Ekasaccaṃ dvīhi saccehi saṅgahitanti ekaṃ akusalasaccaṃ dvīhi dukkhasamudayasaccehi saṅgahitaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ kusalanti tebhūmakaṃ kusalaṃ. Imāni dve dukkhamaggasaccāni kusalaṭṭhena ekasaccena saṅgahitāni, kusalasaccaṃ nāma hoti. Ekaṃ kusalasaccaṃ dvīhi dukkhamaggasaccehi saṅgahitaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ abyākatanti tebhūmakavipākakiriyā rūpañca. Imāni dve dukkhanirodhasaccāni abyākataṭṭhena ekasaccena saṅgahitāni, ekaṃ abyākatasaccaṃ nāma hoti. Ekaṃ abyākatasaccaṃ dvīhi dukkhanirodhasaccehi saṅgahitaṃ. Tīṇi saccāni ekasaccena saṅgahitānīti samudayamagganirodhasaccāni ekena akusalakusalābyākatabhūtena dukkhasaccena saṅgahitāni. Ekaṃ saccaṃ tīhi saccehi saṅgahitanti ekaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ visuṃ akusalakusalaabyākatabhūtehi samudayamagganirodhasaccehi saṅgahitaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘dukkhasamudayasaccāni akusalaṭṭhena samudayasaccena saṅgahitāni, dukkhamaggasaccāni kusalaṭṭhena maggasaccena saṅgahitāni, na dassanaṭṭhena. Dukkhanirodhasaccāni abyākataṭṭhena nirodhasaccena saṅgahitāni, na asaṅkhataṭṭhenā’’ti vaṇṇayanti.
第二经教诵文的解释
2. Dutiyasuttantapāḷivaṇṇanā
13再者,为依另一经之义开示谛之通达,乃引「诸比丘,我于正觉之前」等经而示。此中,「诸比丘,我于正觉之前」:诸比丘,于我证得正觉、即一切知智之前。「尚未完全觉悟时」:于我尚未通达一切法时。「尚为菩萨时」:正处菩萨状态之时。「我生是念」:坐菩提座之我,生起如此遍寻。「味」:以有所回味故,名为味。「过患」:过失、危难。「出离」:离去、脱离。「乐」:能令身心安适,故名为乐,即令生乐受者得安乐。「喜悦」:与喜、悦相应故,令心善美,称为「意美」;意美之状态即「喜悦」,谓与喜相应而显殊胜之乐受本身。「无常」:不持久、不恒常。「苦」:为苦之因,及属行苦故,称为苦。「变易法」:不依原状而住,随老、灭而改变本性之法。由此词,亦明「无我」之状态。「调伏欲贪」:调伏、制御名为欲之贪爱,非调伏色欲。「舍断欲贪」:对此欲贪之舍离与断除。
13. Puna aññassa suttantassa atthavasena saccappaṭivedhaṃ niddisitukāmo pubbe me, bhikkhavetiādikaṃ suttantaṃ āharitvā dassesi. Tattha pubbe me, bhikkhave, sambodhāti bhikkhave, mama sambodhito sabbaññutaññāṇato pubbe. Anabhisambuddhassāti sabbadhamme appaṭividdhassa. Bodhisattasseva satoti bodhisattabhūtasseva. Etadahosīti bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa etaṃ parivitakkitaṃ ahosi. Assādoti assādīyatīti assādo. Ādīnavoti doso . Nissaraṇanti apagamanaṃ. Sukhanti sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Somanassanti pītisomanassayogato sobhanaṃ mano assāti sumano, sumanassa bhāvo somanassaṃ , sukhameva pītiyogato visesitaṃ. Aniccanti addhuvaṃ. Dukkhanti dukkhavatthuttā saṅkhāradukkhattā ca dukkhaṃ. Vipariṇāmadhammanti avasī hutvā jarābhaṅgavasena parivattanapakatikaṃ. Etena anattabhāvo vutto hoti. Chandarāgavinayoti chandasaṅkhātassa rāgassa saṃvaraṇaṃ, na vaṇṇarāgassa. Chandarāgappahānanti tasseva chandarāgassa pajahanaṃ.
在“只要我还未……”等句中,应这样联系上下文来理解:“只要我对于这五种取蕴……未能如实了知、未能以超胜智证得,那时我便未曾宣称已证悟无上正自觉、成就无上一切知、是阿拉汉。”其中,“只要”是虚词。“当……时”指那时,或那个时刻。“然后,紧接着”指在那之后。“而且,于我心中生起了知与见”:指在我心中生起了具有见的作用的、名为“见”的审察智。“不动摇”即不可扰动、不可动摇。“解脱”即阿拉汉果的解脱。由这果的审察,对于道与涅槃的审察实际上都已说明。“这是最后一生”指这是最后的五蕴相续运转。“如今不再有后有”指从此不再有新的生起。由此,也说明了对于已断烦恼的审察,因为阿拉汉没有对于残余烦恼的审察。
Yāvakīvañcātiādīsu yāva imesaṃ pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ…pe… yathābhūtaṃ nābbhaññāsiṃ na adhikena ñāṇena paṭivijjhiṃ, tāva anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ anuttaraṃ sabbaññubhāvaṃ abhisambuddho abhisametāvī arahanti nevāhaṃ paccaññāsiṃ neva paṭiññaṃ akāsinti sambandhato attho. Kīvañcāti nipātamattaṃ. Yatoti yasmā, yadā vā. Athāti anantaraṃ. Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādīti dassanakiccakaraṇena dassanasaṅkhātaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇañca me uppajji. Akuppāti kopetuṃ cāletuṃ asakkuṇeyyā. Vimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Etāya eva phalapaccavekkhaṇāya magganibbānapaccavekkhaṇāpi vuttāva honti. Ayamantimā jātīti ayaṃ pacchimā khandhappavatti. Natthidāni punabbhavoti idāni puna uppatti natthi. Etena pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇā vuttā. Arahato hi avasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇā na hoti.
第二经教解释的释明
3. Dutiyasuttantaniddesavaṇṇanā
14十四、在证知谛的智的次第中:“这是色的味”说为以断除来证知:于前行阶段,知“这是与爱相应的色的味”,于道刹那,以断集为内涵的集谛证知便生起。“集谛”即集谛证知智。即使是缘取圣谛为对象的智,也如在“凡是善法,全都摄入四圣谛”等教导中,被称为“谛”。又,“这是色的过患”说为以遍知来证知:于前行阶段,知“这是色的过患”,于道刹那,以遍知苦为内涵的苦谛证知生起。“苦谛”即苦谛证知智。“这是色的出离”说为以作证来证知:于前行阶段,知“这是色的出离”,于道刹那,以作证灭为内涵的灭谛证知生起。“灭谛”即以灭为对象的灭谛证知智。而所谓“在这三处中”,即指在如前所述的集、苦、灭这三处,依证知之力而转起的正见与正思惟。修习的证知,便是以修道为内涵的道谛证知。“道谛”即道谛证知智。
14. Saccappaṭivedhañāṇayojanakkame ca ayaṃ rūpassa assādoti pahānappaṭivedhoti pubbabhāge ‘‘ayaṃ taṇhāsampayutto rūpassa assādo’’ti ñatvā maggakkhaṇe samudayappahānasaṅkhāto samudayasaccappaṭivedho. Samudayasaccanti samudayasaccappaṭivedhañāṇaṃ. Ariyasaccārammaṇañāṇampi hi ‘‘ye keci kusalā dhammā, sabbe te catūsu ariyasaccesu saṅgahaṃ gacchantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.300) viya ‘‘sacca’’nti vuccati. Ayaṃ rūpassa ādīnavoti pariññāpaṭivedhoti pubbabhāge ‘‘ayaṃ rūpassa ādīnavo’’ti ñatvā maggakkhaṇe dukkhapariññāsaṅkhāto dukkhasaccappaṭivedho. Dukkhasaccanti dukkhasaccappaṭivedhañāṇaṃ. Idaṃ rūpassa nissaraṇanti sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhoti pubbabhāge ‘‘idaṃ rūpassa nissaraṇa’’nti ñatvā maggakkhaṇe nirodhasacchikiriyāsaṅkhāto nirodhasaccappaṭivedho. Nirodhasaccanti nirodhasaccārammaṇaṃ nirodhasaccappaṭivedhañāṇaṃ . Yā imesu tīsu ṭhānesūti imesu yathāvuttesu tīsu samudayadukkhanirodhesu paṭivedhavasena pavattā yā diṭṭhi yo saṅkappoti yojanā. Bhāvanāpaṭivedhoti ayaṃ maggabhāvanāsaṅkhāto maggasaccappaṭivedho. Maggasaccanti maggasaccappaṭivedhañāṇaṃ.
15十五、再者,为以另一种方式显示诸谛及证知谛的道理,故说“谛,以几种行相为谛”等。其中,一切的一切知菩萨,坐于菩提座时,寻求老死等苦谛的因——生等,心想:“这究竟是什么?”就在这样寻求时,他们确定了“缘”,从而把握老死等苦谛的因,即生等,作为集谛。因此,那种寻求与那种把握,由于是对诸谛的寻求与把握,故被称为“谛”,也就是从寻求义与把握义而说。这种把握缘的方法,独觉佛也同样可得;而声闻则是依传闻来把握缘。所谓“以通达的意义”,是指在前行阶段如此被寻求、被把握的那些谛,于道刹那,以同一通达之义而说。
15. Puna aparena pariyāyena saccāni ca saccappaṭivedhañca dassento saccanti katihākārehi saccantiādimāha. Tattha yasmā sabbepi sabbaññubodhisattā bodhipallaṅke nisinnā jarāmaraṇādikassa dukkhasaccassa jātiādikaṃ samudayasaccaṃ ‘‘kiṃ nu kho’’ti esanti, tathā esantā ca jarāmaraṇādikassa dukkhasaccassa jātiādikaṃ samudayasaccaṃ ‘‘paccayo’’ti vavatthapento pariggaṇhanti, tasmā sā ca esanā so ca pariggaho saccānaṃ esanattā pariggahattā ca ‘‘sacca’’nti katvā esanaṭṭhena pariggahaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Ayañca vidhi paccekabuddhānampi paccayapariggahe labbhatiyeva, sāvakānaṃ pana anussavavasena paccayapariggahe labbhati. Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti pubbabhāge tathā esitānaṃ pariggahitānañca maggakkhaṇe ekapaṭivedhaṭṭhena.
在“以何为因”等语句中,“因”等皆是表示原因的异名。因为原因能使结果呈现,犹如催促说“来,抓住它”一般促使它现前,故称为“因”。因为结果从彼处一同生起、出生、现起,故称为“集”、“生”、“现起”。此处之义为:“此以何为因”即是“以何为因”;“此以何为集”即是“以何为集”;“此以何为生”即是“以何为生”;“此以何为现起”即是“以何为现起”。然而,依据前述意义,其“生”也就是因、集、生、现起,故说“以生为因”等。“老死”指苦谛。“老死集”是指它的缘,也就是集谛。“老死灭”指灭谛。“导向老死灭之道”指道谛。依此方式,应了知所有语句中的意义。
Kiṃnidānantiādīsu nidānādīni sabbāni kāraṇavevacanāni. Kāraṇañhi yasmā phalaṃ nideti ‘‘handa naṃ gaṇhathā’’ti appeti viya, tasmā ‘‘nidāna’’nti vuccati. Yasmā phalaṃ tato samudeti, jāyati, pabhavati; tasmā samudayo, jāti, pabhavoti vuccati. Ayaṃ panettha attho – kiṃ nidānaṃ etassāti kiṃnidānaṃ. Ko samudayo etassāti kiṃsamudayaṃ. Kā jāti etassāti kiṃjātikaṃ. Ko pabhavo etassāti kiṃpabhavaṃ. Yasmā pana tassa jāti yathāvuttena atthena nidānañceva samudayo ca jāti ca pabhavo ca, tasmā jātinidānantiādimāha. Jarāmaraṇanti dukkhasaccaṃ. Jarāmaraṇasamudayanti tassa paccayaṃ samudayasaccaṃ. Jarāmaraṇanirodhanti nirodhasaccaṃ. Jarāmaraṇanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadanti maggasaccaṃ. Imināva nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
16十六、“灭智”:指以灭为所缘而生起的了知。所谓“生或是苦谛,或是集谛”,是因为依有缘而得以了知的意义上,它是苦谛;而在作为老死之缘的意义上,它是集谛。这一道理也同样适用于其余各支。而所谓“无明或是苦谛”,则是因为从漏之集起,即是无明集起的意思。
16.Nirodhappajānanāti ārammaṇakaraṇena nirodhassa pajānanā. Jāti siyā dukkhasaccaṃ, siyā samudayasaccanti bhavapaccayā paññāyanaṭṭhena dukkhasaccaṃ , jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭhena samudayasaccaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Avijjā siyā dukkhasaccanti pana āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayaṭṭhenāti.
3. 觉支论
3. Bojjhaṅgakathā
觉支论注解释
Bojjhaṅgakathāvaṇṇanā
17十七、现在,为显示由证知圣谛所成就的觉支殊胜,而敷演以经典为前导的觉支论,并解释其中未说之义。此处,先就经文来说:「觉支」意谓觉悟的支分,或觉悟者的支分。这是说什么呢?当出世间道刹那生起时,有一种法集现前,能对治昏沉、掉举、止住、策励、耽著欲乐与苦行、执取断见与常见等众多过患,这种法集即是所谓的念、择法、精进、喜、轻安、定、舍。圣弟子依此法集而觉悟,故称之为「觉悟」;所谓觉悟,即从烦恼随眠中醒来,或证悟四圣谛,或唯证涅槃。如经中说:‘修习七觉支已,证悟无上正等觉。’因此,这种法集称为觉悟的支分,故名「觉支」,如同禅支、道支等。再者,这位圣弟子由于依前所说的法集而觉悟,便被称为觉悟者;此觉悟者的支分,也名为「觉支」,犹如军队的支分、车的支分等。是故诸注疏师说:‘能觉者之支分,故为觉支。’念等觉支的释义,已于‘应了知’的解说中述及。
17. Idāni saccappaṭivedhasiddhaṃ bojjhaṅgavisesaṃ dassentena kathitāya suttantapubbaṅgamāya bojjhaṅgakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha suttante tāva bojjhaṅgāti bodhiyā, bodhissa vā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.182) – yā hi ayaṃ dhammasāmaggī, yāya lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogaucchedasassatābhinivesādīnaṃ anekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayavīriyapītipassaddhisamādhiupekkhāsaṅkhātāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhatīti katvā bodhīti vuccati, bujjhatīti kilesasantānaniddāya vuṭṭhahati, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati, nibbānameva vā sacchikarotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘satta bojjhaṅge bhāvetvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.378; dī. ni. 3.143). Tassā dhammasāmaggīsaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viya. Yopesa yathāvuttappakārāya etāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako bodhīti vuccati, tassa bodhissa aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘bujjhanakassa puggalassa aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Satisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ attho abhiññeyyaniddese vutto.
在「觉支义」的解释中:「导向菩提」即导向觉悟。为谁的觉悟?是为了通过道与果而观察涅槃、所作已办者的觉悟;或者说,是为了通过道而从烦恼沉睡中醒来,通过果而安住觉醒。这是可以说的。强力的观也是觉支,导向觉悟。因此,这是观觉支、道觉支与果觉支共通的意义。因为在这三种情况下,它们都导向觉悟,导向涅槃的证悟。由此表达了「觉支即是菩提之支」的意思。以「觉悟故」等五个四句偈来说明觉支的生起之处,已在「应了知」的章节中讲过。再者,「觉悟」一词,是为了显示觉支具有完成自身作用的能力,所以采用作者的说法。「以觉悟性」一词,是为了显示虽能完成自身作用,却无实际作者,所以采用修习的说法。「令觉悟」一词,是因为修习觉支能促使那些瑜伽行者觉悟,所以使用使动的因作者说法。「以使觉悟性」一词,则是依前所述,用作因作者来说明修习。通过这些方式,表达了「觉支即是菩提之支」的意思。从「菩提分法」的意义来说,那位通过觉悟功德而得名为「菩提」的瑜伽行者,这些觉支便是他的组成部分。
Bojjhaṅgatthaniddese bodhāya saṃvattantīti bujjhanatthāya saṃvattanti. Kassa bujjhanatthāya? Maggaphalehi nibbānassa paccavekkhaṇāya katakiccassa bujjhanatthāya, maggena vā kilesaniddāto pabujjhanatthāya phalena pabuddhabhāvatthāyāpīti vuttaṃ hoti. Balavavipassanāyapi bojjhaṅgā bodhāya saṃvattanti . Tasmā ayaṃ vipassanāmaggaphalabojjhaṅgānaṃ sādhāraṇattho. Tīsupi hi ṭhānesu bodhāya nibbānapaṭivedhāya saṃvattanti. Etena bodhiyā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bujjhantīti bojjhaṅgātiādīhi pañcahi catukkehi vuttānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānaṃ abhiññeyyaniddese vuttaṃ. Api ca bujjhantīti bojjhaṅgānaṃ sakiccakaraṇe samatthabhāvadassanatthaṃ kattuniddeso . Bujjhanaṭṭhenāti sakiccakaraṇasamatthattepi sati kattuno abhāvadassanatthaṃ bhāvaniddeso. Bodhentīti bojjhaṅgabhāvanāya bujjhantānaṃ yogīnaṃ payojakattā bojjhaṅgānaṃ hetukattuniddeso. Bodhanaṭṭhenāti paṭhamaṃ vuttanayeneva payojakahetukattunā bhāvaniddeso. Etehi bodhiyā aṅgā bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bodhipakkhiyaṭṭhenāti bujjhanaṭṭhena bodhīti laddhanāmassa yogissa pakkhe bhavattā. Ayametesaṃ yogino upakārakattaniddeso. Etehi bodhissa aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hoti. Buddhilabhanaṭṭhenātiādike chakke buddhilabhanaṭṭhenāti yogāvacarena buddhiyā pāpuṇanaṭṭhena. Ropanaṭṭhenāti sattānaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena . Pāpanaṭṭhenāti patiṭṭhāpitāya niṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena. Ime vipassanābojjhaṅgā pati-abhi-saṃ-iti tīhi upasaggehi visesitā maggaphalabojjhaṅgāti vadanti. Sabbesampi dhammavohārena niddiṭṭhānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ bodhiyā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
根根等十法的解释
Mūlamūlakādidasakavaṇṇanā
18十八、在阐述「以根义」等根根十法时:「以根义」:在观等觉支中,前前的觉支对于后后的觉支、对于俱生的诸法,以及彼此之间,皆具「根」的意义。「以根行义」:先成为根,再以根的身分运作,是为「根行」;「以根行义」即是作为根而生起之义。「以根摄义」:这些觉支从初始生起时即被把握、被摄持,故称「摄持」;而它们是作为根的摄持,故名「根摄持」,「以根摄持义」即此。这些觉支彼此如眷属般转起,故是「眷属义」;由修习达至圆满,故是「圆满义」;由到达究竟,故是「熟达义」。这些觉支本身是根,又因有六种分类而具有无碍解的特质,故称「根无碍解」,于是有「以根无碍解义」。「以令到达根无碍解义」:对于精进修习觉支的瑜伽行者,能令他到达这种根无碍解。对该瑜伽行者来说,还有于根无碍解得自在的「自在状态」之义。在其他类似以人为对象的名称中,应知悉皆表达「觉支即觉者之支」的意思。而在「于根无碍解得自在者」这类表述中。
18.Mūlaṭṭhenātiādike mūlamūlake dasake mūlaṭṭhenāti vipassanādīsu purimā purimā bojjhaṅgā pacchimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ bojjhaṅgānañca sahajātadhammānañca aññamaññañca mūlaṭṭhena. Mūlacariyaṭṭhenāti mūlaṃ hutvā cariyā pavatti mūlacariyā. Tena mūlacariyaṭṭhena, mūlaṃ hutvā pavattanaṭṭhenāti attho. Mūlapariggahaṭṭhenāti te eva bojjhaṅgā ādito pabhuti uppādanatthāya parigayhamānattā pariggahā, mūlāniyeva pariggahā mūlapariggahā. Tena mūlapariggahaṭṭhena. Te eva aññamaññaṃ parivāravasena parivāraṭṭhena. Bhāvanāpāripūrivasena paripūraṇaṭṭhena. Niṭṭhaṃ pāpuṇanavasena paripākaṭṭhena. Te eva mūlāni ca chabbidhā pabhedabhinnattā paṭisambhidā cāti mūlapaṭisambhidā. Tena mūlapaṭisambhidaṭṭhena. Mūlapaṭisambhidāpāpanaṭṭhenāti bojjhaṅgabhāvanānuyuttassa yogino taṃ mūlapaṭisambhidaṃ pāpanaṭṭhena . Tasseva yogino tassā mūlapaṭisambhidāya vasībhāvaṭṭhena. Sesesupi īdisesu puggalavohāresu bodhissa aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Mūlapaṭisambhidāya vasībhāvappattānampīti īdisesupi niṭṭhāvacanesu phalabojjhaṅgāti veditabbaṃ. Vasībhāvaṃ pattānantipi pāṭho.
对于其余九种十法——如因根等,其中凡属共通性的言辞,都应依此道理来理解。而在不共之处,则如所说:前面所提及的那些觉支,对于前面提到的种种法,因为是它们的能生之因,故名为“因”;因为能资助、支撑它们,故名为“缘”。这些觉支本身,由于具足彼分断、正断、止息、清净的自性,故名为“清净”;由于远离一切过失,故名为“无过”。依据“一切善法皆是出离”的教导,故名为“出离”;由烦恼解脱——或以彼分解脱等方式,故名为“解脱”。道觉支与果觉支,因为远离了那些被作为所缘的诸漏,故名为“无漏”。三种觉支,因为从烦恼中空无,以彼分远离等方式,故名为“远离”。观觉支与道觉支,由于以完全舍离的方式遣舍,以及以跃入涅槃的方式遣舍,故名为“遣舍”;果觉支则唯以跃入的方式遣舍,故亦名为“遣舍”。
Sesesupi hetumūlakādīsu navasu dasakesu imināva nayena sādhāraṇavacanānaṃ attho veditabbo . Asādhāraṇesu pana yathāvuttā eva bojjhaṅgā yathāvuttānaṃ dhammānaṃ janakattā hetū nāma honti. Upatthambhakattā paccayā nāma. Te eva tadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhivisuddhibhūtattā visuddhi nāma. Vajjavirahitattā anavajjā nāma. ‘‘Sabbepi kusalā dhammā nekkhamma’’nti vacanato nekkhammaṃ nāma. Kilesehi vimuttattā tadaṅgavimuttiādivasena vimutti nāma. Maggaphalabojjhaṅgā visayībhūtehi āsavehi virahitattā anāsavā. Tividhāpi bojjhaṅgā kilesehi suññattā tadaṅgavivekādivasena vivekā. Vipassanāmaggabojjhaṅgā pariccāgavosaggattā pakkhandanavosaggattā ca vosaggā. Phalabojjhaṅgā pakkhandanavosaggattā vosaggā.
1919. 对于以“觉知根义”等逐词说明的九种十法,应依前文所述方式来理解。然而,“得自在者”一语,因并非现在时的表述,故在此不适用。而“摄受义”等,已在“应了知”的章节中作过解释。
19.Mūlaṭṭhaṃbujjhantītiādayo ekekapadavasena niddiṭṭhā nava dasakā vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Vasībhāvappattānanti padaṃ pana vattamānavacanābhāvena na yojitaṃ. Pariggahaṭṭhādayo abhiññeyyaniddese vuttatthā.
2020. 接着,长老希望透过解说,开示觉支的修习方法,便先诵出自己所说的经,继而说出“一时”等作为序言的缘起,然后诵出经文。正因为此经是他自己所说,所以这里没有说“如是我闻”。而说“尊者舍利弗”,则是为了表明说法者的身份,以第三人称来称呼自己,如同在叙说他人一般。这样的表达方式,世俗典籍中也常被采用。“于午前时分”:指整个午前时段,此处用业格表示完全涵盖整个时段的意味;其余两个时分——午后与夜晚——的说法,也是同样的道理。对于“念觉支如是而有”这句经文,意思是:“像这样的念觉支,确实在我心中生起。”“无量成为我的”,意即:“无量”这一状态在我心中出现。“善修习成为我的”,意即:“完全圆满地修习”这一状态在我心中出现。“住”:指的是在缘取涅槃为所缘时,持续安住于其中。“退”:指的是从涅槃所缘退失、远离。对于其他觉支,也应依此方式来理解。
20. Puna thero attanā desitaṃ suttantaṃ uddisitvā tassa niddesavasena bojjhaṅgavidhiṃ dassetukāmo ekaṃ samayantiādikaṃ nidānaṃ vatvā suttantaṃ tāva uddisi. Attanā desitasuttattā eva cettha evaṃ me sutanti na vuttaṃ. Āyasmā sāriputtoti panettha desakabyattibhāvatthaṃ attānaṃ paraṃ viya katvā vuttaṃ. Īdisañhi vacanaṃ loke ganthesu payujjanti. Pubbaṇhasamayanti sakalaṃ pubbaṇhasamayaṃ. Accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Satisambojjhaṅgo iti ceme hotīti satisambojjhaṅgoti evañce mayhaṃ hoti. Appamāṇoti me hotīti appamāṇoti evaṃ me hoti. Susamāraddhoti me hotīti suṭṭhu paripuṇṇoti evaṃ me hoti. Tiṭṭhantanti nibbānārammaṇe pavattivasena tiṭṭhantaṃ. Cavatīti nibbānārammaṇato apagacchati. Sesabojjhaṅgesupi eseva nayo.
“国王的大臣”:指国王身边的重臣,或指拥有广大财富、以财富多寡来衡量之人。“种种染色之物”:指各种颜色染成的物品,此处用属格表达“充满”之义,即指种种染色之物。“Dussakaraṇḍaka”意为衣箱。“Dussayuga”意为成对之衣。“Pārupituṃ”意为穿着。在这部经中,长老开示的是果觉支。当长老以念觉支为首而入果等至时,其余觉支便随之生起;如果以择法觉支等任一觉支为首而入,其余觉支也同样跟着生起。长老正是为了显示自己在果等至中所具备的熟练与自在,才讲述了此经。
Rājamahāmattassāti rañño mahāamaccassa, mahatiyā vā bhogamattāya bhogappamāṇena samannāgatassa. Nānārattānanti nānāraṅgarattānaṃ, pūraṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, nānārattehīti attho. Dussakaraṇḍakoti dussapeḷā. Dussayuganti vatthayugalaṃ. Pārupitunti acchādetuṃ. Imasmiṃ suttante therassa phalabojjhaṅgā kathitā. Yadā hi thero satisambojjhaṅgaṃ sīsaṃ katvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, tadā itare tadanvayā honti. Yadā dhammavicayādīsu aññataraṃ, tadā sesāpi tadanvayā hontīti evaṃ phalasamāpattiyā attano ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ dassento thero imaṃ suttantaṃ kathesīti.
经文解释的注释
Suttantaniddesavaṇṇanā
21“如何是‘念觉支如是而有’?”这是问:以念觉支为首入果等至时,即便其他觉支也存在,这样生起的念觉支是怎样的?也就是说,在生起此念觉支的人当中,那个念觉支究竟是什么?“灭出现的时间”:指灭出现的时间长度,即在那种时间里,涅槃作为所缘而出现。“火焰的程度”:指光焰的量。“如何成为无量”:这是问:在无量的念觉支也存在的情况下,这样成为无量的念觉支是怎样的?也就是说,在生起此念觉支的人当中,那个无量的念觉支是什么?“有量所缚”:烦恼、缠缚以及带来再有的诸行,称为“有量所缚”。据《中部》所说“贪作量,嗔作量,痴作量”,当某人生起贪等时,便以“这有这么多”的方式去度量,因此称为“量”。被系缚、被挂碍、依赖于这个量,故烦恼等就叫作“有量所缚”。其中的“烦恼”指随眠烦恼,“缠缚”指现行烦恼。“带来再有的行”:一再制造存有的,就是“再有”;以这种存有为性的,称为“带来再有的”;即善与不善的业行。“无量”:因为没有上述那种量,故称“无量”。道与果也是无量的,为了显示其殊胜,故以“不动”义及……
21.Kathaṃsatisambojjhaṅgo iti ce hotīti bojjhaṅgoti satisambojjhaṅgaṃ sīsaṃ katvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjantassa aññesu bojjhaṅgesu vijjamānesu evaṃ ayaṃ satisambojjhaṅgo hotīti iti ce pavattassa kathaṃ so satisambojjhaṅgo hotīti attho. Yāvatā nirodhūpaṭṭhātīti yattakena kālena nirodho upaṭṭhāti, yattake kāle ārammaṇato nibbānaṃ upaṭṭhātīti attho. Yāvatā accīti yattakena parimāṇena jālā. Kathaṃ appamāṇo iti ce hotīti bojjhaṅgoti na appamāṇepi satisambojjhaṅge vijjamāne evaṃ ayaṃ appamāṇo hotīti iti ce pavattassa so appamāṇo satisambojjhaṅgo kathaṃ hotīti attho. Pamāṇabaddhāti kilesā ca pariyuṭṭhānā ca ponobhavikasaṅkhārā ca pamāṇabaddhā nāma honti. ‘‘Rāgopamāṇakaraṇo, doso pamāṇakaraṇo, moho pamāṇakaraṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.459) vacanato rāgādayo yassa uppajjanti, ‘‘ayaṃ ettako’’ti tassa pamāṇakaraṇato pamāṇaṃ nāma. Tasmiṃ pamāṇe baddhā paṭibaddhā āyattāti kilesādayo pamāṇabaddhā nāma honti. Kilesāti anusayabhūtā, pariyuṭṭhānāti samudācārappattakilesā. Saṅkhārā ponobhavikāti punappunaṃ bhavakaraṇaṃ punabhavo, punabhavo sīlametesanti ponabhavikā, ponabhavikā eva ponobhavikā. Kusalākusalakammasaṅkhātā saṅkhārā. Appamāṇoti vuttappakārassa pamāṇassa abhāvena appamāṇo. Maggaphalānampi appamāṇattā tato visesanatthaṃ acalaṭṭhena asaṅkhataṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Bhaṅgābhāvato acalo, paccayābhāvato asaṅkhato. Yo hi acalo asaṅkhato ca, so ativiya pamāṇavirahito hoti.
“如何是‘善修习’?”应按前述方式理解。“不平”:其本身就不平坦,又是造成不平状态的原因,所以称为“不平”。“平正之法”:以其寂静义与殊胜义,故为平正之法。因无量限,故为寂静;正如经中所说:“诸比丘,凡是有为法或无为法,离欲于这些法中被称为最上”,因为是于一切法中最为高胜的意思,所以是殊胜的。在这平正的法中极其精勤修习的,即称为“善修习”。“因转向故”:这是针对果等至生起的时间而言,意思是,意门转向心在那所谓的不生的涅槃中生起。“住立”:即生起、运行的意思。“生起等”的含义,前面已经解释过了。以其余各个觉支为根本的那些段落,也应按此方式来理解。
Kathaṃ susamāraddho iti ce hotīti bojjhaṅgoti anantaraṃ vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. Visamāti sayañca visamattā, visamassa ca bhāvassa hetuttā visamā. Samadhammoti santaṭṭhena paṇītaṭṭhena samo dhammo. Pamāṇābhāvato santo. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) vacanato sabbadhammuttamaṭṭhena paṇīto. Tasmiṃ samadhammoti vutte susame āraddho susamāraddho. Āvajjitattāti phalasamāpattiyā pavattakālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Anuppādādisaṅkhāte nibbāne manodvārāvajjanassa uppannattāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tiṭṭhatīti pavattati. Uppādādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāni. Sesabojjhaṅgamūlakesupi vāresu eseva nayo.
慈心论注释
Mettākathāvaṇṇanā
22以下是对觉支论之后所说慈心论的注释,此论随觉支论之脉络展开,并以经文为前导,其中将阐释未曾说明的意义。首先,就经文而言:「已修习」:指以殷重心修习。「已多修习」:指已令其增长。「已多所作」:指反复修习。「已作乘」:指使之成为如已套好的车乘。「已作依处」:指建立为犹如地基的所依处。「已安立」:指已现前安立。「已惯习」:指从各方面反复修习积集。「已善修习」:指极为善巧地精勤修习,亦即修习圆满。这里的「功德」指殊胜的利益。「应期望」:应当期待、应当希求的。「安乐眠」:不似他人那般辗转反侧、呻吟叫苦,而是安稳睡眠,纵入睡眠亦如入定一般。「安乐寤」:不似他人醒时叹息、哈欠、扭动不适,而是犹如莲花缓缓舒展,安乐醒觉,无有倦苦。「不梦见恶梦」:纵有梦境,唯见吉祥之梦,如礼敬佛塔、恭敬供养、听闻正法;不似他人梦见被贼包围、被猛兽追逐、从悬崖坠落,不会梦见此类恶梦。「为人类所喜爱」:犹如胸前所佩真珠璎珞,为人所喜爱。
22. Idāni bojjhaṅgakathānantaraṃ kathitāya bojjhaṅgakathāgatiyā suttantapubbaṅgamāya mettākathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha suttante tāva āsevitāyāti ādarena sevitāya. Bhāvitāyāti vaḍḍhitāya. Bahulīkatāyāti punappunaṃ katāya. Yānīkatāyāti yuttayānasadisāya katāya. Vatthukatāyāti patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vatthu viya katāya. Anuṭṭhitāyāti paccupaṭṭhitāya. Paricitāyāti samantato citāya upacitāya. Susamāraddhāyāti suṭṭhu samāraddhāya sukatāya . Ānisaṃsāti guṇā. Pāṭikaṅkhāti paṭikaṅkhitabbā icchitabbā. Sukhaṃ supatīti yathā sesajanā samparivattamānā kākacchamānā dukkhaṃ supanti, evaṃ asupitvā sukhaṃ supati. Niddaṃ okkantopi samāpattiṃ samāpanno viya hoti. Sukhaṃ paṭibujjhatīti yathā aññe nitthunantā vijambhantā samparivattantā dukkhaṃ paṭibujjhanti, evaṃ apaṭibujjhitvā vikasamānamiva padumaṃ sukhaṃ nibbikāraṃ paṭibujjhati. Na pāpakaṃ supinaṃ passatīti supinaṃ passantopi bhaddakameva supinaṃ passati. Cetiyaṃ vandanto viya pūjaṃ karonto viya dhammaṃ suṇanto viya ca hoti. Yathā panaññe attānaṃ corehi parivāritaṃ viya vāḷehi upaddutaṃ viya papāte patantaṃ viya ca passanti, na evaṃ pāpakaṃ supinaṃ passati. Manussānaṃ piyo hotīti ure āmuttamuttāhāro viya sīse piḷandhamālā viya ca manussānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo. Amanussānaṃ piyo hotīti yatheva ca manussānaṃ, evaṃ amanussānampi piyo hoti. Devatā rakkhantīti puttamiva mātāpitaro devatā rakkhanti. Nāssa aggi vā visaṃ vā satthaṃ vā kamatīti mettāvihārissa kāye aggi vā visaṃ vā satthaṃ vā na kamati na pavisati, nāssa kāyaṃ vikopetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tuvaṭaṃ cittaṃ samādhiyatīti mettāvihārino khippameva cittaṃ samādhiyati, natthi tassa dandhāyitattaṃ. Mukhavaṇṇo vippasīdatīti bandhanā pamuttatālapakkaṃ viya cassa vippasannavaṇṇaṃ mukhaṃ hoti. Asammūḷho kālaṃ karotīti mettāvihārino sammohamaraṇaṃ nāma natthi, asammūḷho niddaṃ okkamanto viya kālaṃ karoti. Uttari appaṭivijjhantoti mettāsamāpattito uttariṃ arahattaṃ adhigantuṃ asakkonto ito cavitvā suttappabuddho viya brahmalokūpago hotīti brahmalokaṃ upapajjatīti attho.
在慈心的分别中:「无方所遍满」:方所即界限,无方所即没有界限,因此称为「无方所」,意即没有区域限制地全面遍满、触及。「有方所」:指依特定范围来修习。「方向遍满」:指在各个方向遍满。「一切」:完全无余,全部总摄。「有情」一词的意义,在《智论》的论母注释中已经说过;不过依通俗用语,此称呼也用于离贪者,犹如竹篾扇亦名「多罗叶扇」一般。「无怨」:远离了怨恨。「无嗔」:远离了嗔恨。「无恼」:没有苦恼(亦读作无折磨)。「愿安乐而有身」:愿他们能快乐地生存。其中,「无怨」显示了对自方与他方皆无怨恨;「无嗔」等表明因无怨恨,故无以此为根源的嗔恨;「无恼」表明因无嗔恨,故无以此为根源的苦恼;「愿安乐而有身」表明因无苦恼,故能安乐生活。应知此处文句间的关联即是如此。而于此「无怨」「无嗔」「无恼」「愿安乐而有身」四句中,哪一句在心中最为显明,便依那一句来遍满慈心。
Mettāniddese anodhiso pharaṇāti odhi mariyādā, na odhi anodhi. Tato anodhiso, anodhitoti attho, nippadesato phusanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Odhisoti padesavasena. Disāpharaṇāti disāsu pharaṇā. Sabbeti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Sattātipadassa attho ñāṇakathāmātikāvaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto, ruḷhīsaddena pana vītarāgesupi ayaṃ vohāro vattati vilīvamayepi bījanivisese tālavaṇṭavohāro viya. Averāti verarahitā. Abyāpajjāti byāpādarahitā. Anīghāti niddukkhā. Anigghātipi pāṭho. Sukhī attānaṃpariharantūti sukhitā hutvā attabhāvaṃ vattayantu. ‘‘Averā’’ti ca sakasantāne ca pare paṭicca, parasantāne ca itare paṭicca verābhāvo dassito, ‘‘abyāpajjā’’tiādīsu verābhāvā tammūlakabyāpādābhāvo, ‘‘anīghā’’ti byāpādābhāvā tammūlakadukkhābhāvo, ‘‘sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū’’ti dukkhābhāvāsukhena attabhāvapariharaṇaṃ dassitanti evamettha vacanasambandho veditabboti. Imesu ca ‘‘averā hontū’’tiādīsu catūsupi vacanesu yaṃ yaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tassa tassa vasena mettāya pharati.
在「命」等词中,因有呼吸而得名「命」,意思是依入出息而存活。因已生起而称为「生」,指已再生者。「地狱」名为puṃ,流向地狱者,故称「人」。「有身」是指身体,或即五蕴;由于仅依此施设而存在,因此属于彼有身、被彼有身所限定、包含于彼有身之中的,便叫作「有身所摄」。正如「众生」一词,其余那些词也都是依寻常的言说而安立,当知这些都是「一切众生」的同义词。固然还有其他如「一切生类、一切命者」等一切众生的同义词,但为显明故,只取此五,而说「以五种方式无分别遍满的慈心解脱」。若有人不把这些词当作单纯的名言,还想追求其意义上的差别,那就与无分别遍满相违了。因此,不应那样执取意义,应在这五种方式中,随取一种作无分别的慈心遍满。
Pāṇātiādīsu pāṇanatāya pāṇā, assāsapassāsāyattavuttitāyāti attho. Bhūtattā bhūtā, abhinibbattāti attho. Puṃ vuccati nirayo, taṃ puṃ galanti gacchantīti puggalā. Attabhāvo vuccati sarīraṃ, khandhapañcakameva vā, taṃ upādāya paññattimattasabbhāvato, tasmiṃ attabhāve pariyāpannā paricchinnā antogadhāti attabhāvapariyāpannā. Yathā ca sattāti vacanaṃ, evaṃ sesānipi ruḷhīvasena āropetvā sabbānetāni sabbasattavevacanānīti veditabbāni. Kāmañca aññānipi ‘‘sabbe jantū sabbe jīvā’’tiādīni sabbasattavevacanāni atthi, pākaṭavasena pana imāneva pañca gahetvā ‘‘pañcahākārehi anodhiso pharaṇā mettācetovimuttī’’ti vuccati. Ye pana ‘‘sattā pāṇā’’tiādīnaṃ na kevalaṃ vacanamattatova, atha kho atthatopi nānattameva iccheyyuṃ, tesaṃ anodhiso pharaṇā virujjhati. Tasmā tathā atthaṃ aggahetvā imesu pañcasu ākāresu aññataravasena anodhiso mettāya pharati.
在分别遍满中,「女人」「男人」是依性别而说;「圣者」「非圣者」是依圣者与凡夫而说;「天」「人」「堕恶趣者」是依再生方式而说。就方向遍满而言:若不作方向区分,于一切方向以「一切众生」等方式遍满,即为无分别遍满;若于一切方向以「一切女人」等方式遍满,则为分别遍满。
Odhiso pharaṇe pana itthiyo purisāti liṅgavasena vuttaṃ, ariyā anariyāti ariyaputhujjanavasena, devāmanussā vinipātikāti upapattivasena. Disāpharaṇepi disāvibhāgaṃ akatvā sabbadisāsu ‘‘sabbe sattā’’tiādinā nayena pharaṇato anodhiso pharaṇā hoti, sabbadisāsu ‘‘sabbā itthiyo’’tiādinā nayena pharaṇato odhiso pharaṇā.
然而,这三种慈心遍满都是依安止心而说,因此在三种情形中都应取安止。于无分别遍满中:「愿一切众生无怨」为一句,「愿无嗔恨」为一句,「愿无忧恼」为一句,「愿他们安乐而自护」为一句。这四句也都是依利益的施与而说,因为慈的特相正是利益的施与。如此,在「众生」等五种方式中,每种四句安止,便有二十种安止。在分别遍满中,于「一切女人」等七种方式,每种四句安止,便有二十八种安止。在方向遍满中:依「东方的一切众生」等方式,每方有二十安止,十方共二百安止;依「东方的一切女人」等方式,每方有二十八安止,十方共二百八十安止;合此则为四百八十种安止。由此,此处所说的一切安止,总计为五百二十八种安止。正如对慈的三种遍满所作的解说,对悲、喜、舍的遍满也应作如是了知。
Yasmā pana ayaṃ tividhāpi mettāpharaṇā appanāpattacittassa vasena vuttā, tasmā tīsu vāresu appanā gahetabbā. Anodhiso pharaṇe tāva ‘‘sabbe sattā averā hontū’’ti ekā, ‘‘abyāpajjā hontū’’ti ekā ‘‘anīghā hontū’’ti ekā, ‘‘sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū’’ti ekā. Tānipi hi cattāri hitopasaṃhāravaseneva vuttāni. Hitopasaṃhāralakkhaṇā hi mettā. Iti ‘‘sattā’’tiādīsu pañcasu ākāresu catassannaṃ catassannaṃ appanānaṃ vasena vīsati appanā honti, odhiso pharaṇe ‘‘sabbā itthiyo’’tiādīsu sattasu ākāresu catassannaṃ catassannaṃ vasena aṭṭhavīsati appanā. Disāpharaṇe pana ‘‘sabbe puratthimāya disāya sattā’’tiādinā nayena ekamekissā disāya vīsati vīsati katvā dve satāni, ‘‘sabbā puratthimāya disāya itthiyo’’tiādinā nayena ekamekissā disāya aṭṭhavīsati aṭṭhavīsati katvā asīti dve satānīti cattāri satāni asīti ca appanā. Iti sabbānipi idha vuttāni aṭṭhavīsādhikāni pañca appanāsatāni honti. Yathā ca mettāya tividhena pharaṇā vuttā, tathā karuṇāmuditāupekkhānampi vuttāva hotīti veditabbaṃ.
1. 根抉择的解释
1. Indriyavāravaṇṇanā
23接着,为了显示慈等至的方式以及诸根的修习,而说“舍弃对一切众生的压迫”等语。其中,“压迫”指内在身体的逼迫;“毁坏”指外在身体的伤害;“热恼”指任何形式的内心热恼;“消亡”指寿命等的自然灭尽;“损害”指从外而来的生命损害。“舍弃”,是说以自心将压迫等一一摒除。这压迫等五词,是从遮止慈等至的对立面而说的;而不压迫等,则是从慈等至本身而说。“以不压迫”,即是以不压迫的方式,对一切众生修习慈,应如此连接理解。其余的也是如此。“莫怨、莫苦、莫有苦性”这三句,是遮止慈等至对立面的言说。“莫”字意为“愿他们不要”。“无怨、安乐、有乐性”这三句,是显示慈等至本身的言说。应当知道,“无嗔恨、无忧恼”这两者,已为“安乐”一词所包含。“有乐性”是显示那安乐的持续现起。“有乐性”与“愿他们安乐而自护”,意义是相同的。又或者,不压迫等词也已包含无嗔恨、无忧恼的意思。“以八种方式”,就是指以“不压迫”等五种慈等至的方式,加上“愿无怨”等三种慈等至的方式,总为八种方式。“修习慈”即滋润内心。“思惟
23. Atha mettūpasaṃhārākāraṃ indriyādiparibhāvanañca dassetuṃ sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ pīḷanaṃ vajjetvātiādimāha. Tattha pīḷananti abbhantarato sarīrapīḷanaṃ. Upaghātanti bāhirato sarīropaghātaṃ. Santāpanti yathā tathā vā cittasantāpanaṃ. Pariyādānanti pakatiyā jīvitādiparikkhayaṃ. Vihesanti parato jīvitaviheṭhanaṃ. Vajjetvāti pīḷanādīsu ekekaṃ attano citteneva apanetvā. Imāni pīḷanādīni pañca padāni mettopasaṃhārassa paṭipakkhavivajjanavasena vuttāni, apīḷanāyātiādīni mettopasaṃhāravasena. Apīḷanāyāti apīḷanākārena, sabbe satte mettāyatīti sambandho. Evaṃ sesesupi. Mā verino mā dukkhino mā dukkhitattāti imānipi tīṇi mettopasaṃhārassa paṭipakkhapaṭikkhepavacanāni. Mā-vacanassa mā hontūti attho. Averino sukhino sukhitattāti imāni tīṇi mettopasaṃhāravacanāni. ‘‘Abyāpajjā anīghā’’ti idaṃ dvayaṃ ‘‘sukhino’’ti vacanena saṅgahitanti veditabbaṃ. Sukhitattāti tasseva sukhassa niccappavattidassanaṃ. ‘‘Sukhitattā’’ti ca ‘‘sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū’’ti ca atthato ekaṃ. ‘‘Apīḷanāyā’’tiādīhi vā abyāpajjānīghavacanāni saṅgahitāni. Aṭṭhahākārehīti ‘‘apīḷanāyā’’tiādayo pañca mettopasaṃhārākārā ‘‘averino hontū’’tiādayo tayo mettopasaṃhārākārāti imehi aṭṭhahākārehi. Mettāyatīti siniyhati. Taṃ dhammaṃ cetayatīti taṃ hitopasaṃhāraṃ cetayati abhisandahati, pavattetīti attho. Sabbabyāpādapariyuṭṭhānehivimuccatīti mettāya paṭipakkhabhūtehi sabbehi byāpādasamudācārehi vikkhambhanato vimuccati. Mettā ca ceto ca vimutti cāti ekāyeva mettā tidhā vaṇṇitā.
“无怨、安稳、安乐”这三句,是总摄前面已说的种种方式而说。“以信胜解”等所说到的五根,皆是与慈相应的。在“习修”等六项中,“习修”是指依这些法而修习慈,故称习修。同样,“修习”即多修习。“庄严”是装饰。“善庄严”是善加装饰、善加严饰。“资具”是必需品。“善资具”是善能具足必需品。“眷属”是依守护义而说。此外,习修等二十八个词,是为了称叹慈的功德而说。其中,“圆满”指到达圆满的状态。“俱有”指与慈俱有。俱生等词,也是如此。“投入”指由慈投入,或依这些法投入于慈,故称投入。沉入等词,也是如此。“此为寂静触”,是说此慈是寂静的,彼触依此而起,故说“此为寂静触”;这里用中性词,如“此是最上”等的用法一样。“善住立”是善能安住。“善兴起”是善能提起。“善解脱”是从各自的对立面中善能解脱。“令生起”,指与慈相应而令慈生起。“令照耀”,是令其显明。“令发光”,是令其光亮。
Averino khemino sukhinoti imāni tīṇi padāni pubbe vutte ākāre saṅkhepena saṅgahetvā vuttāni. Saddhāya adhimuccatītiādinā nayena vuttāni pañcindriyāni mettāya sampayuttāniyeva. Āsevanātiādīsu chasu vāresu āsevīyati etehi mettāti āsevanā. Tathā bhāvanā bahulīkammaṃ. Alaṅkārāti vibhūsanā. Svālaṅkatāti suṭṭhu alaṅkatā bhūsitā. Parikkhārāti sambhārā. Suparikkhatāti suṭṭhu sambhatā. Parivārāti rakkhanaṭṭhena. Puna āsevanādīni aṭṭhavīsati padāni mettāya vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttāni. Tattha pāripūrīti paripuṇṇabhāvā. Sahagatāti mettāya sahagatā. Tathā sahajātādayo. Pakkhandanāti mettāya pavisanā, pakkhandati etehi mettāti vā pakkhandanā. Tathā saṃsīdanādayo. Etaṃ santanti phassanāti esā mettā santāti etehi phassanā hotīti etaṃ santanti phassanā ‘‘etadagga’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 1.188 ādayo) viya napuṃsakavacanaṃ. Svādhiṭṭhitāti suṭṭhu patiṭṭhitā. Susamuggatāti suṭṭhu samussitā. Suvimuttāti attano attano paccanīkehi suṭṭhu vimuttā. Nibbattentīti mettāsampayuttā hutvā mettaṃ nibbattenti. Jotentīti pākaṭaṃ karonti. Patāpentīti virocenti.
2-4. 力等三种抉择的解释
2-4. Balādivārattayavaṇṇanā
24-27“力”的抉择,也应依照“根”的抉择中所说的方法来理解。“觉支”与“道支”的抉择,是从同义异名的角度而说,并非依各别特相而说。在“道支”的抉择中,“正语”“正业”“正命”是依于慈的前分而说,不是依于安止而说,因为它们并非与慈同时存在。而“一切众生”等其余抉择的意义,也当依“众生”抉择中所说的方法来理解。至于修习慈的详细方法,则应从《清净道论》中去获得。
24-27. Indriyavāre vuttanayeneva balavāropi veditabbo. Bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgavārā pariyāyena vuttā, na yathālakkhaṇavasena. Maggaṅgavāre sammāvācākammantājīvā mettāya pubbabhāgavasena vuttā, na appanāvasena. Na hi ete mettāya saha bhavanti. Sabbesaṃ pāṇānantiādīnaṃ sesavārānampi sattavāre vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Mettābhāvanāvidhānaṃ pana visuddhimaggato (visuddhi. 1.240 ādayo) gahetabbanti.
5. 离贪论
5. Virāgakathā
离贪论的解释
Virāgakathāvaṇṇanā
2828. 现在,紧接在前文所说、以道为目的与归宿的慈心论之后,要对名为「离贪」、且以道为先导的离贪论,进行前所未释的义理注释。在此,首先为了解释“厌离者离贪,由离贪而解脱”(《大品》23)这两句经文的含义,先举出总纲:「离贪是道,解脱是果」。接着,为了先解释词义,便这样问道:“为什么说离贪是道?”等等。在此,「离贪」(virajjati)的意思是成为离贪者。其余各词的含义,在道智的解释中已经说过了。「离贪」(virāgo):因为正见本身离贪,所以就被称为「离贪」,这是它的含义。而这个离贪,因为它是以离贪为所缘……乃至……安住于离贪中,所以也称为「离贪」。应当这样来理解“以离贪为所缘”等五个词语之间的关联。在此,「以离贪为所缘」,意为以涅槃为所缘。「以离贪为行境」,意为以涅槃为行境。「在离贪中生起」,意为在涅槃中生起。「住于离贪」,意为以持续活动的方式安住于涅槃。「安立于离贪」,意为以不退转的方式安立于涅槃。
28. Idāni maggapayojanapariyosānāya mettākathāya anantaraṃ kathitāya virāgasaṅkhātamaggapubbaṅgamāya virāgakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha paṭhamaṃ tāva ‘‘nibbindaṃ virajjati virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (mahāva 23) vuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ suttantapadānaṃ atthaṃ niddisitukāmena virāgo maggo, vimutti phalanti uddeso ṭhapito. Tattha paṭhamaṃ vacanatthaṃ tāva niddisitukāmo kathaṃ virāgo maggotiādimāha. Tattha virajjatīti virattā hoti. Sesāni maggañāṇaniddese vuttatthāni. Virāgoti yasmā sammādiṭṭhi virajjati, tasmā virāgo nāmāti attho . So ca virāgo yasmā virāgārammaṇo…pe… virāge patiṭṭhito, tasmā ca virāgoti evaṃ ‘‘virāgārammaṇo’’tiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ vacanānaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Tattha virāgārammaṇoti nibbānārammaṇo. Virāgagocaroti nibbānavisayo. Virāge samudāgatoti nibbāne samuppanno. Virāge ṭhitoti pavattivasena nibbāne ṭhito. Virāge patiṭṭhitoti anivattanavasena nibbāne patiṭṭhito.
“涅槃即是离贪”(nibbānañca virāgo):涅槃因为能作为离贪的原因,所以被称为「离贪」。“以涅槃为所缘而生”(nibbānārammaṇatājātā):是指在涅槃这个所缘上生起,或者指以涅槃为所缘的这种状态而生起。那些所有与道相应的触等诸法,以离染的功用而言,也都是「离贪」,因此它们也被称为「离贪」。「俱生」(sahajātāni),是指与正见一同生起的正思惟等其他七道支。“走向离贪”(virāgaṃ gacchanti):也就是“离贪是道”这句话的意思——将离贪,也就是涅槃作为所缘对象而走向它。换言之,由于它以离贪为所缘,所以叫做「离贪」;又因为它能起到道(行进)的作用,所以也叫做「道」。每一个单独的道支也都能获得「道」的名称。像这样,当说明每一个支都是道时,正见是道这一点也就被说出来了。正因如此,当说到“由此道”时,是把八个道支都包括在一起说的。“及诸佛”(Buddhā ca):诸佛也包括独觉佛在内。因为佛陀也曾说过:“诸位比丘,有两种佛:如来、阿拉汉”
Nibbānañca virāgoti nibbānaṃ virāgahetuttā virāgo. Nibbānārammaṇatājātāti nibbānārammaṇe jātā, nibbānārammaṇabhāvena vā jātā. Te maggasampayuttā sabbeva phassādayo dhammā virajjanaṭṭhena virāgā hontīti virāgā nāma honti. Sahajātānīti sammādiṭṭhisahajātāni sammāsaṅkappādīni satta maggaṅgāni. Virāgaṃ gacchantīti virāgo maggoti virāgaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā gacchantīti virāgārammaṇattā virāgo nāma, magganaṭṭhena maggo nāma hotīti attho. Ekekampi maggaṅgaṃ maggoti nāmaṃ labhati. Iti ekekassa aṅgassa maggatte vutte sammādiṭṭhiyāpi maggattaṃ vuttameva hoti. Tasmāyeva ca etena maggenāti aṭṭha maggaṅgāni gahetvā vuttaṃ. Buddhā cāti paccekabuddhāpi saṅgahitā. Tepi hi ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, buddhā tathāgato ca arahaṃ sammāsambuddho paccekabuddho cā’’ti (a. ni. 2.57) vuttattā buddhāyeva . Agatanti anamatagge saṃsāre agatapubbaṃ. Disanti sakalāyapaṭipattiyā dissati apadissati abhisandahīyatīti disā, sabbabuddhehi vā paramaṃ sukhanti dissati apadissati kathīyatīti disā , sabbadukkhaṃ vā dissanti vissajjenti ujjhanti etāyāti disā. Taṃ disaṃ. Aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yo so aṭṭhaṅgiko dhammasamūho, so etena nibbānaṃ gacchantīti gamanaṭṭhena maggo nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ parappavādānanti visuṃ visuṃ samaṇānaṃ brāhmaṇānañca ito aññaladdhikānaṃ. Aggoti tesaṃ sesamaggānaṃ visiṭṭho. Seṭṭhoti sesamaggato ativiya pasaṃsanīyo. Mokkhoti mukhe sādhu, sesamaggānaṃ abhimukhe ayameva sādhūti attho. Uttamoti sesamagge ativiya uttiṇṇo. Pavaroti sesamaggato nānappakārehi saṃbhajanīyo. Itīti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Tasmā bhagavatā ‘‘maggānaṃ aṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho’’ti vuttoti adhippāyo. Vuttañhi bhagavatā –
于诸道中,八支道最胜;于诸谛中,四谛最胜;于诸法中,离贪最胜;于两足者中,具眼者最胜。
‘‘Maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho, saccānaṃ caturo padā; Virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṃ, dvipadānañca cakkhumā’’ti. (dha. pa. 273);
此处截取此偈的“于诸道中,八支道最胜”一句而说。其余段落之义,亦当依此方法及前文所说之方法而解。
Taṃ idha vicchinditvā ‘‘maggānaṃ aṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesavāresupi iminā ca nayena heṭṭhā vuttanayena ca attho veditabbo.
在「见离贪」等表述中,名为“见”的离贪即是「见离贪」。由于“力”较“根”更为殊胜,故此处从根的角度先说力,应如是了知。以增上的意义而说“根”等,是为解释“根”等术语的含义,而非解释“离贪”的含义。以如实之义,“谛”即指谛智,应如是知。「戒清净」:即正语、正业、正命。「心清净」:即正定。「见清净」:即正见、正思惟。“以解脱义”:即从各自道所应断的烦恼中解脱出来的意义。「明」:即正见。「解脱」:即以正断的方式实现的解脱。“以究竟之义,不死之深处——涅槃——即是道”:这是说,通过道果的省察,它被称为“道”,即“被寻求、被探究的道路”。
Dassanavirāgotiādīsu dassanasaṅkhāto virāgo dassanavirāgo. Indriyaṭṭhato balassa visiṭṭhattā idha indriyato balaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ādhipateyyaṭṭhena indriyānītiādi indriyādīnaṃ atthavibhāvanā, na virāgassa. Tathaṭṭhena saccāti saccañāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sīlavisuddhīti sammāvācākammantājīvā. Cittavisuddhīti sammāsamādhi. Diṭṭhivisuddhīti sammādiṭṭhisaṅkappā. Vimuttaṭṭhenāti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi muttaṭṭhena. Vijjāti sammādiṭṭhi. Vimuttīti samucchedavimutti. Amatogadhaṃ nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṭṭhena maggoti maggaphalapaccavekkhaṇāhi maggīyatīti maggo.
在此离贪解说中所述的诸法,皆仅存在于道刹那。在解脱解说中,则存在于果刹那。因此,欲与作意等也同属于道与果。
Imasmiṃ virāganiddese vuttā dhammā sabbepi maggakkhaṇeyeva. Vimuttiniddese phalakkhaṇe. Tasmā chandamanasikārāpi maggaphalasampayuttā.
29在解脱解说中,当如离贪解说所述的方法来理解其义。然而,此处果因是已止息的解脱,故称为「解脱」;涅槃因是出离的解脱,故称为「解脱」。诸如“俱生的七支”等语句,于此并无依据,故未言及。仅因果本身即是解脱,故以舍弃之义而说为「解脱」,仅此而已。其余内容,如同前说。
29. Virāganiddese vuttanayeneva vimuttiniddesepi attho veditabbo. Phalaṃ panettha paṭippassaddhivimuttattā vimutti, nibbānaṃ nissaraṇavimuttattā vimutti. ‘‘Sahajātāni sattaṅgānī’’tiādīni vacanāni idha na labbhantīti na vuttāni. Sayaṃ phalavimuttattā pariccāgaṭṭhena vimuttīti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
无碍解论
6. Paṭisambhidākathā
转法轮品注释
1. Dhammacakkapavattanavāravaṇṇanā
30现在,为显示依离染之道而成就的无碍解分类,开始注释以《转法轮经》为先导的无碍解论,阐明前所未有之义。首先,经中云:「于波罗奈」——波罗奈是一条河的名称,离河不远处有座城,即波罗奈城。在波罗奈城中。「于仙人堕处的鹿野苑」——因诸仙人曾在此降落与飞起而得名,又因是施予鹿群无畏的场所,故称鹿野苑。意谓:不断证悟的一切知者——诸佛,为转法轮而降临并安坐于此。世尊从难陀池窟出定,经七日后,出灭尽定,于阿耨达池洗漱后,从空中降临;独觉佛们也在此处降临集会;他们为布萨或非布萨等事而聚集;当返回香山时,又从此处腾空飞起。因此,凭借诸仙人降落与飞起的缘由,此地被称为「仙人堕处」。也有读作「仙人足处」的。关于「五群比丘」——
30. Idāni virāgasaṅkhātamaggavasena siddhaṃ paṭisambhidāpabhedaṃ dassentena kathitāya dhammacakkappavattanasuttantapubbaṅgamāya paṭisambhidākathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Suttante tāva bārāṇasiyanti bārāṇasā nāma nadī, bārāṇasāya avidūre bhavā nagarī bārāṇasī. Tassaṃ bārāṇasiyaṃ. Isipatane migadāyeti isīnaṃ patanuppatanavasena evaṃladdhanāme migānaṃ abhayadānadinnaṭṭhānattā migadāyasaṅkhāte ārāme. Tattha hi uppannuppannā sabbaññuisayo patanti, dhammacakkappavattanatthaṃ nisīdantīti attho. Nandamūlakapabbhārato sattāhaccayena nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhitā anotattadahe katamukhadhovanakiccā ākāsena āgantvā paccekabuddhaisayopettha samosaraṇavasena patanti , uposathatthañca anuposathatthañca sannipatanti, gandhamādanaṃ paṭigacchantā ca tato ca uppatantītipi iminā isīnaṃ patanuppatanavasena taṃ ‘‘isipatana’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Isipadana’’ntipi pāṭho. Pañcavaggiyeti –
‘‘Koṇḍañño bhaddiyo vappo, mahānāmo ca assaji; Ete pañca mahātherā, pañcavaggāti vuccare’’ti. –
“五群比丘”:如此所说的五位比丘组成的团体,称为“五群”。此五位比丘属于该团体,故称“五群比丘”,即指那五位。世尊对比丘们说:世尊自于燃灯佛十力尊足下发大愿始,便圆满诸波罗蜜,渐次至于最后一生;于最后一生出家,次第行至菩提道场,端坐于不坏金刚座上,摧破魔军。初夜分时,忆念宿命;中夜分时,净化天眼;后夜尽时,震动一万世界界,成就一切知智。于菩提道场度过七七日,应大梵天劝请,决意说法,以佛眼观察世间,出于悲悯,前往波罗奈,欲度化五群比丘而转法轮,故说此语。
Evaṃ vuttānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vaggo pañcavaggo. Tasmiṃ pañcavagge bhavā taṃpariyāpannattāti pañcavaggiyā, te pañcavaggiye. Bhikkhū āmantesīti dīpaṅkaradasabalassa pādamūle katābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya pāramiyo pūrento anupubbena pacchimabhavaṃ patvā pacchimabhave ca katābhinikkhamano anupubbena bodhimaṇḍaṃ patvā tattha aparājitapallaṅke nisinno mārabalaṃ bhinditvā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritvā majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhetvā pacchimayāmāvasāne dasasahassilokadhātuṃ unnādento sampakampento sabbaññutaṃ patvā satta sattāhāni bodhimaṇḍe vītināmetvā mahābrahmunā āyācitadhammadesanā buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ voloketvā lokānuggahena bārāṇasiṃ gantvā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetvā dhammacakkaṃ pavattetukāmo āmantesi.
“诸比丘,有此二边”:意思是,诸比丘,有此二边、此二部分。当世尊说出此言时,法音向下至无间地狱,向上至有顶天,遍满一万世界界而住。就在那时,十八亿梵天前来聚集。太阳西沉,满月于东方与北娄宿星相会而升起。就在此时,世尊开始宣说《转法轮经》,说出了“诸比丘,有此二边……”等语。
Dveme, bhikkhave, antāti dveme, bhikkhave, koṭṭhāsā. Imassa pana vacanassa samudāhārena samudāhāranigghoso heṭṭhā avīciṃ upari bhavaggaṃ patvā dasasahassiṃ lokadhātuṃ pattharitvā aṭṭhāsi, tasmiṃyeva samaye aṭṭhārasakoṭisaṅkhā brahmāno samāgacchiṃsu. Pacchimadisāya sūriyo atthaṅgameti, puratthimāya disāya uttarāsāḷhanakkhattena yutto puṇṇacando uggacchati. Tasmiṃ samaye bhagavā dhammacakkappavattanasuttantaṃ ārabhanto ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, antā’’tiādimāha.
在此,“为出家人”指已断除家庭束缚与所依之欲而出家之人。“不应亲近”指不应受用。因出家人特别适合成为修行的法器,故说“出家人不应亲近”。而“于诸欲中沉湎欲乐”,即指在所依之欲中,沉湎于烦恼欲乐,或沉湎于以烦恼欲乐为所依者。这是“低下”的:即低劣。“村野”的:指属于凡俗村民的。“凡夫”的:为愚痴凡夫所惯行之举。“非圣”的:非圣者所有;或说,此非清净崇高的圣者所拥有。“无义相应”:不与真实义利相应,不依止于能带来安乐之因。再者,“沉湎于自我折磨”:指沉湎于折磨自身,即自造痛苦之义。这是“苦”的:指依荆棘床等卧具与自我折磨所带来的痛苦。对于苦行者们,因其执著“此即最上苦行”,世尊为顾念其心,于此未说“低下”;因其是出家人之法,故未说“村野”;因其与在家人不共,故未说“凡夫”。而在彼处,另有一些自许为出家人、宣称“见法涅槃”者,如此执取:“贤者,当此自我被五种妙欲功德所满足、所具足时……
Tattha pabbajitenāti gihisaṃyojanaṃ vatthukāmaṃ chetvā pabbajitena. Na sevitabbāti na valañjetabbā. Pabbajitānaṃyeva visesato paṭipattiyā bhājanabhūtattā ‘‘pabbajitena na sevitabbā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo cāyaṃ kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogoti yo ca ayaṃ vatthukāmesu kilesakāmasukhassa, kilesakāmasukhanissayassa vā anuyogo. Hīnoti lāmako. Gammoti gāmavāsīnaṃ santako. Pothujjanikoti puthujjanena andhabālajanena āciṇṇo. Anariyoti na ariyo. Atha vā na visuddhānaṃ uttamānaṃ ariyānaṃ santako. Anatthasaṃhitoti na atthasaṃhito, sukhāvahakāraṇaṃ anissitoti attho. Attakilamathānuyogoti attano kilamathassa anuyogo , attano dukkhakaraṇanti attho. Dukkhoti kaṇṭakāpassayaseyyādīhi attamāraṇehi dukkhāvaho. Tapassīhi ‘‘uttamaṃ tapo’’ti gahitattā tesaṃ cittānurakkhanatthaṃ idha ‘‘hīno’’ti na vuttaṃ, pabbajitānaṃ dhammattā ‘‘gammo’’ti ca, gihīhi asādhāraṇattā ‘‘pothujjaniko’’ti ca na vuttaṃ. Tattha pana kehici pabbajitapaṭiññehi diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādehi ‘‘yato kho, bho , ayaṃ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgibhūto paricāreti, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṃ attā diṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.94) gahitattā tesaṃ cittānurakkhanatthañca paccuppanne sukhattā ca tassa dhammasamādānassa ‘‘dukkho’’ti na vuttaṃ. Kāmasukhallikānuyogo paccuppanne taṇhādiṭṭhisaṃkiliṭṭhasukhattā āyatiñca dukkhavipākattā tadanuyuttānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhibandhanabaddhattā ca na sevitabbo, attakilamathānuyogo paccuppanne diṭṭhisaṃkiliṭṭhadukkhattā āyatiñca dukkhavipākattā tadanuyuttānaṃ diṭṭhibandhanabaddhattā ca na sevitabbo, ete khoti te ete. Anupagammāti na upagantvā. Majjhimāti saṃkiliṭṭhasukhadukkhānaṃ abhāvā majjhe bhavāti majjhimā. Sā eva nibbānaṃ paṭipajjanti etāyāti paṭipadā. Abhisambuddhāti paṭividdhā. Cakkhukaraṇītiādīsu paññācakkhuṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī. Ñāṇakaraṇīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Upasamāyāti kilesūpasamāya. Abhiññāyāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ abhijānanatthāya. Sambodhāyāti tesaṃyeva sambujjhanatthāya. Nibbānāyāti nibbānasacchikiriyatthāya. Atha vā dassanamaggañāṇaṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī. Bhāvanāmaggañāṇaṃ karotīti ñāṇakaraṇī. Sabbakilesānaṃ upasamāya. Sabbadhammānaṃ abhiññāya. Arahattaphalasambodhāya. Kilesānañca khandhānañca nibbānāya. Saccakathā abhiññeyyaniddese vuttā.
如此,世尊阐明诸谛后,对于那些对他深怀崇敬的五比丘,为令其安住修行、证见圣谛现观,他先令其闻知自己证悟的次第,从而令其对修行生起崇敬,随即以“诸比丘,此是苦圣谛……”等语,开示了自身的证悟次第。其中,“前所未闻”:指未曾听闻,非随他人之后而听来之意。“眼”等之义,后文当释。“此是苦圣谛、此是苦集、此是苦灭、此是导至苦灭之道圣谛”,此乃对有学地四圣谛的“见通达”。“应遍知、应断、应作证、应修习”,此乃对有学地四圣谛的“修习通达”。“已遍知、已断、已作证、已修习”,此乃对无学地四圣谛的“省察”。
Evaṃ bhagavā saccāni pakāsetvā attani katabahumānānaṃ tesaṃ attano paṭivedhakkamaṃ sutvā paṭipattiyā bahumānāropanena paṭipattiyaṃ ṭhatvā saccappaṭivedhaṃ passanto idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti me, bhikkhavetiādinā attano paṭivedhakkamaṃ dassesi. Tattha ananussutesūti na anussutesu, paraṃ anugantvā assutesūti attho. Cakkhūtiādīnaṃ attho parato āvi bhavissati. Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, idaṃ dukkhasamudayaṃ, idaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ, idaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccanti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ dassanapaṭivedho sekhabhūmiyaṃ. Pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ bhāvetabbanti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedho sekhabhūmiyaṃyeva. Pariññātaṃ pahīnaṃ sacchikataṃ bhāvitanti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā asekhabhūmiyaṃ.
「三转」:依谛智、作智、已作智这三种转,故有三转,称为三转。在此,对于四圣谛如实地了知“此是苦,此是苦集,此是苦灭,此是导至苦灭之道圣谛”,这种如实智称为谛智。对于这些同样的圣谛,了知所应做之事——“应遍知、应断、应作证、应修习”的智,称为作智。了知此事已作之状态——“已遍知、已断、已作证、已修习”的智,称为已作智。十二行相:即于每一圣谛各依三种行相,故有十二行相。智见:依此三转十二行相而生起的、称为智的见。心满意足:即自心满意。因为众生乐求快乐、厌恶痛苦,与喜和悦相应之心称为自心满意;或者,被喜与悦所充满、所执持、所遍满之心,即为此义。欢喜赞叹:正面迎向而欢喜。记说:即经。因为无偈颂的经纯粹是义理的记说,故称为记说。正在说时:即正在被宣说时。此处以现在时表达近过去时,意为“已说”。离尘:即远离贪等尘。离垢:即远离贪等垢。因为贪等以覆盖之义为尘,以染污之义为垢。法眼:于某处指初道智,于某处指前三道智,于某处亦指第四道智。但此处唯指初道智。意思是:依观智之力,了知“凡任何集起之法,彼一切皆是灭尽之法”而转起者,生起了法眼。
Tiparivaṭṭanti saccañāṇakiccañāṇakatañāṇasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ parivaṭṭānaṃ vasena tayo parivaṭṭā assāti tiparivaṭṭaṃ. Ettha hi ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, idaṃ dukkhasamudayaṃ , idaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ, idaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasacca’’nti evaṃ catūsu saccesu yathābhūtañāṇaṃ saccañāṇaṃ nāma. Tesuyeva ‘‘pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ bhāvetabba’’nti evaṃ kattabbakiccajānanañāṇaṃ kiccañāṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Pariññātaṃ pahīnaṃ sacchikataṃ bhāvita’’nti evaṃ tassa kiccassa katabhāvajānanañāṇaṃ katañāṇaṃ nāma. Dvādasākāranti tesaṃyeva ekekasmiṃ sacce tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena dvādasa ākārā assāti dvādasākāraṃ. Ñāṇadassananti etesaṃ tiparivaṭṭānaṃ dvādasannaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena uppannaṃ ñāṇasaṅkhātaṃ dassanaṃ. Attamanāti sakamanā. Sattānañhi sukhakāmattā dukkhapaṭikūlattā pītisomanassayuttamano sakamano nāma, pītisomanassehi attamanā gahitamanā byāpitamanāti vā attho. Abhinandunti abhimukhā hutvā nandiṃsu. Veyyākaraṇeti suttante. Niggāthako hi suttanto kevalaṃ atthassa byākaraṇato veyyākaraṇaṃ nāma. Bhaññamāneti kathiyamāne. Vattamānasamīpe vattamānavacanaṃ kataṃ, bhaṇiteti attho. Virajanti vigatarāgādirajaṃ. Vītamalanti vigatarāgādimalaṃ. Rāgādayo hi ajjhottharaṇaṭṭhena rajo nāma, dūsanaṭṭhena malaṃ nāma. Dhammacakkhunti katthaci paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ, katthaci ādīni tīṇi maggañāṇāni, katthaci catutthamaggañāṇampi . Idha pana paṭhamamaggañāṇameva. Yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhammanti vipassanāvasena evaṃ pavattassa dhammacakkhuṃ udapādīti attho.
法轮:指证悟智与说法智。世尊坐于菩提树下,对四圣谛以十二行相证悟的证悟智,以及坐于仙人堕处,为开示圣谛而以十二行相转起说法的说法智,二者皆称为法轮。因为此二者皆是十力尊者的转起智。当世尊以此说法彰显此智时,便称为转法轮。然而,此法轮直到具寿憍陈如与十八亿梵天一同安住于须陀洹果之前,世尊正在令其转起;当他们安住于果位之后,则称为已转。正是依此而说‘在世尊已转法轮时’。
Dhammacakketi paṭivedhañāṇe ca desanāñāṇe ca. Bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa hi bhagavato catūsu saccesu dvādasākāraṃ paṭivedhañāṇampi isipatane nisinnassa dvādasākārameva saccadesanāya pavattakadesanāñāṇampi dhammacakkaṃ nāma. Ubhayampi hetaṃ dasabalassa pavattañāṇameva. Taṃ imāya desanāya pakāsentena bhagavatā dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ nāma. Taṃ panetaṃ dhammacakkaṃ yāva aññātakoṇḍaññatthero aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale na patiṭṭhāti, tāva bhagavā pavatteti nāma, patiṭṭhite pana pavattitaṃ nāma. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘pavattite ca bhagavatā dhammacakke’’ti vuttaṃ.
地居天:即住于地界之天。令声遍闻:他们一时齐发善哉,并说“此是世尊……”等语,令此声遍闻。不可逆转:即不能以“此非如是”的方式反向推翻。应知:此处集会而来的诸天梵天,于说法终了一时齐发善哉;而未参加集会的地居天等,听闻他们各自之声后,亦发善哉。其中,生于山、树等处者为地居天。他们虽属四天王天,但此处特别分开来说。四天王天:即持国、增长、广目、俱毗罗四大天王为其天王,故称四天王天。他们住于须弥山半腰,其中有住山者,亦有住空者,他们的相续一直到达轮围山。戏乐懈怠天、意愤天、冷云天、热云天、月天子、日天子,这一切亦皆住于四天王天界。三十三天:因有三十三位众生在那里化生。又有人说,“三十三天”即是那些天众的名称。他们亦有住山者,有住空者,他们的相续到达轮围山,夜摩天等亦复如是。即使在一个天界中,天众的相续亦无不遍及轮围山。夜摩天:已往、已行、已到达天乐者。兜率天:满足、喜悦者。化乐天:除了本有的自然所缘之外,当更欲游乐时,能随心所欲地变化种种妙欲乐具而享乐。他化自在天:了知他人心念后,于他所化作的妙欲中自在受用。
Bhummādevāti bhūmaṭṭhakā devā. Saddamanussāvesunti ekappahāreneva sādhukāraṃ datvā etaṃ bhagavatātiādīni vadantā saddaṃ anussāvayiṃsu. Appaṭivattiyanti ‘‘nayidaṃ tathā’’ti paṭilomaṃ vattetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ. Sannipatitā cettha devabrahmāno desanāpariyosāne ekappahāreneva sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu, sannipātaṃ anāgatā pana bhummadevādayo tesaṃ tesaṃ saddaṃ sutvā sādhukāramadaṃsūti veditabbaṃ. Tesu pana pabbatarukkhādīsu nibbattā bhummadevā. Te cātumahārājikapariyāpannā hontāpi idha visuṃ katvā vuttā. Cātumahārājikāti ca dhataraṭṭhavirūḷhakavirūpakkhakuverasaṅkhātā catumahārājā devatā etesanti cātumahārājikā. Te sineruvemajjhe honti. Tesu pabbataṭṭhakāpi atthi ākāsaṭṭhakāpi. Tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā. Khiḍḍāpadosikā manopadosikā sītavalāhakā uṇhavalāhakā candimā devaputto sūriyo devaputtoti ete sabbepi cātumahārājikadevalokaṭṭhā eva. Tettiṃsa janā tattha uppannāti tāvatiṃsā. Apica ‘‘tāvatiṃsā’’ti tesaṃ devānaṃ nāmamevātipi vuttaṃ. Tepi atthi pabbataṭṭhakā atthi ākāsaṭṭhakā. Tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā, tathā yāmādīnaṃ. Ekadevalokepi hi devānaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ appattā nāma natthi. Dibbaṃ sukhaṃ yātā payātā sampattāti yāmā. Tuṭṭhā pahaṭṭhāti tusitā. Pakatipaṭiyattārammaṇato atirekena ramitukāmakāle yathārucite bhoge nimminitvā nimminitvā ramantīti nimmānaratī. Cittācāraṃ ñatvā paranimmitesu bhogesu vasaṃ vattentīti paranimmitavasavattī. Brahmakāye brahmaghaṭāya niyuttāti brahmakāyikā. Sabbepi pañcavokārabrahmāno gahitā.
将“彼刹那”(tena khaṇena)加以限定而说为“彼须臾”(tena muhuttena),意即以称为须臾的刹那,而不是以究竟刹那来说的。“乃至梵天界”(yāva brahmalokā)是指以梵天界为边际。“声”(saddo)即赞叹声。“十千”(dasasahassī)指拥有一万个轮围界。“震动”(saṅkampī)指向上涌起而剧烈震动。“遍震动”(sampakampī)指向上涌起又向下沉落,整体强烈震动。“遍涌震”(sampavedhī)指向四方推移而剧烈涌震。当菩萨为成就正自觉而入母胎,以及菩萨从母胎中出来时,大地依靠福德威力而震动;在正等觉时,依靠证悟智的威力而震动;在转法轮时,依靠说法智的威力,好像想要发出赞叹,大地凭借地居天众的神力而震动;在舍弃寿行和般涅槃时,由于悲悯,好像无法承受心的激荡,大地也凭借地居天众的神力而震动。“无量”(appamāṇo)是指广大的量。“广大”(uḷāro)这个词,在“广大、广大的嚼食”等句中,是指甘甜;在“对于广大的财富受用心不倾注”等句中,是指殊胜。
Tena khaṇenāti vacanaṃ visesetvā tena muhuttenāti vuttaṃ. Muhuttasaṅkhātena khaṇena, na paramatthakhaṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yāva brahmalokāti brahmalokaṃ antokatvā. Saddoti sādhukārasaddo. Dasasahassīti dasasahassacakkavāḷavatī. Saṅkampīti uddhaṃ uggacchantī suṭṭhu kampi. Sampakampīti uddhaṃ uggacchantī adho okkamantī suṭṭhu pakampi. Sampavedhīti catudisā gacchantī suṭṭhu pavedhi. Sambuddhabhāvāya mātukucchiṃ okkamante ca bodhisatte tato nikkhamante ca mahāpathavī puññatejena akampittha, abhisambodhiyaṃ paṭivedhañāṇatejena. Dhammacakkappavattane desanāñāṇatejena sādhukāraṃ dātukāmā viya pathavī devatānubhāvena akampittha, āyusaṅkhārossajjane mahāparinibbāne ca kāruññena cittasaṅkhobhaṃ asahamānā viya pathavī devatānubhāvena akampittha. Appamāṇoti vuddhappamāṇo. Uḷāroti ettha ‘‘uḷārāni uḷārāni khādanīyāni khādantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.366) madhuraṃ uḷāranti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Uḷārāya vatthabhogāya cittaṃ na namatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 9.20) paṇītaṃ uḷāranti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Uḷārāya khalu bhavaṃ vacchāyano samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pasaṃsāya pasaṃsatī’’tiādīsu seṭṭhaṃ uḷāranti vuttaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘vipulo uḷāro’’ti vutto. Obhāsoti desanāñāṇānubhāvena ca devatānubhāvena ca jātaobhāso. Loketi cakkavāḷassa dasasahassiyaṃyeva. Atikkammeva devānaṃ devānubhāvanti devānaṃ ayamānubhāvo – nivatthavatthappabhā dvādasa yojanāni pharati, tathā sarīrassa alaṅkārassa vimānassa ca. Taṃ devānaṃ devānubhāvaṃ atikkamitvāyevāti attho. Udānanti somanassañāṇamayikaṃ udāhāraṃ. Udānesīti udāhari. Aññāsi vata, bho koṇḍaññoti imassapi udānassa udāharaṇaghoso dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharitvā aṭṭhāsi. Aññāsikoṇḍaññoti bhusaṃ ñātakoṇḍaññoti attho.
在解释眼等时,关于“以见义”等言说:那同一个智,由于能完成如同眼一般的“见”的作用,故称为“眼”;由于能完成智的作用,故称为“智”;由于能以种种方式完成了知的作用,故称为“慧”;由于能完成无余通达的作用,故称为“明”;由于能周遍地完成照亮的作用,故称为“光”——这便是其义。在“法眼”等表述中,亦复如是,即根据作用的不同,将那同一个智描述为五种。所谓“所缘”,是指能作为支撑的对象;“行处”,是指领域、范围。在“以见义”等言说中,是将智的作用分作五种而说。依此理,于三个场合的每一处,各有五法、五义,合为十五法、十五义;在此十五法与十五义中,有三十种言辞,应如此了知为六十种智。对于其余的圣谛,道理亦同。于四圣谛中,每一圣谛依此十五法、十五义,则成六十法与六十义;依此六十法与六十义,则有一百二十种言辞。如此,于六十法、六十义及一百二十种言辞中,合为二百四十种智——即二百四十。
Cakkhuādīnaṃ niddese dassanaṭṭhenātiādīsu ekameva ñāṇaṃ yathāvuttassa neyyassa cakkhu viya dassanakiccakaraṇena cakkhu. Ñāṇakiccakaraṇena ñāṇaṃ. Nānappakārato jānanakiccakaraṇena paññā. Anavasesapaṭivedhakaraṇena vijjā. Sabbathā obhāsakiccakaraṇena āloko nāmāti attho. Cakkhuṃ dhammotiādīsupi ekaṃyeva ñāṇaṃ kiccanānattena pañcadhā vaṇṇitaṃ. Ārammaṇāti upatthambhanaṭṭhena. Gocarāti visayaṭṭhena. Dassanaṭṭhenātiādīsu ñāṇakiccaṃ pañcadhā vuttaṃ. Iminā nayena tīsu vāresu ekekasmiṃ pañca pañca katvā pannarasa dhammā, pannarasa atthā, dvīsu pannarasakesu tiṃsa niruttiyo, pannarasasu dhammesu pannarasasu atthesu tiṃsāya niruttīsūti saṭṭhi ñāṇāni veditabbāni. Sesaariyasaccesupi eseva nayo. Catūsu ariyasaccesu ekekasmiṃ ariyasacce pannarasannaṃ pannarasannaṃ dhammānaṃ atthānañca vasena saṭṭhi dhammā, saṭṭhi atthā, saṭṭhiyā dhammesu saṭṭhiyā atthesu ca vīsasataṃ niruttiyo, vīsādhikaṃ satanti attho. Saṭṭhiyā dhammesu saṭṭhiyā atthesu vīsuttarasate niruttīsūti evaṃ cattārīsañca dve ca ñāṇasatāni.
2-3. 念处品等的注释
2-3. Satipaṭṭhānavārādivaṇṇanā
31-3231-32. 在以《念处经》为首及以《神足经》为首的无碍解道解说中,也应依此同样的方法,了知其中的意义与数目。
31-32. Satipaṭṭhānasuttantapubbaṅgame iddhipādasuttantapubbaṅgame ca paṭisambhidāniddese imināva nayena attho ca gaṇanā ca veditabbā.
4-8. 七菩萨品等的注释
4-8. Sattabodhisattavārādivaṇṇanā
33-3733-37. 在有关七位菩萨的经典中,于每一部经内:在集谛方面,有眼等五法;在灭谛方面,有五法,合为十法。在集谛方面,有见义等五义;在灭谛方面,有五义,合为十义。依此十法与十义,成二十种言辞及四十种智。将七部经合起来总说,其数目便容易了知。在依一切知智而作的无碍解道解说中,对于每一个根本所包含的“了知、见、识、作证、触、以慧”(《无碍解道》1.121)这五个词,每一个词都有眼等五法和见义等五义,如此五组各五,即为二十五法、二十五义,翻倍则为如许言辞与如许智。若将五词合为一组而说,即是五次二十五,成一百二十五法、一百二十五义,翻倍则为如许言辞与如许智。这里所说的“两个半百”,即指二百五十。对于蕴等,道理也是一样。依此道理,于谛品类及无碍解品类中,法等的数目应如此了知。
33-37. Sattannaṃ bodhisattānaṃ suttantesu ekekasmiṃyeva samudaye cakkhādayo pañca, nirodhe pañcāti dasa dhammā, samudaye dassanaṭṭhādayo pañca, nirodhe pañcāti dasa atthā, tesaṃ vasena vīsati niruttiyo cattārīsaṃ ñāṇāni. Satta ekato katvā vuttagaṇanā suviññeyyā eva. Sabbaññutaññāṇavasena vuttapaṭisambhidāniddese ekekamūlakesu ‘‘ñāto diṭṭho vidito sacchikato phassito paññāyā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.121) imesu pañcasu vacanesu ekekasmiṃyeva cakkhādayo pañca, dassanaṭṭhādayo pañcāti pañcapañcakānaṃ vasena pañcavīsati dhammā, pañcavīsati atthā, taddiguṇā niruttiyo, taddiguṇāni ñāṇāni ñeyyāni. Pañca ekato katvā vuttavārepi pañcakkhattuṃ pañca pañcavīsati katvā pañcavīsasataṃ dhammā, pañcavīsasataṃ atthā, taddiguṇā niruttiyo, taddiguṇāni ñāṇāni ñeyyāni. Aḍḍhateyyānīti cettha dve satāni ca paññāsañca. Khandhādīsupi eseva nayo. Imināva nayena saccavārapaṭisambhidāvāre ca dhammādigaṇanā veditabbā.
9. 六佛法品的注释
9. Chabuddhadhammavāravaṇṇanā
3838. 在佛法品中,“一个半百”即六次二十五,也就是一百五十法;言辞的数量为此数的两倍,智的数量又为言辞数量的两倍。在《无碍解论处》中,“九百五十法”的计算方式如下:最初所说的四圣谛有六十法;四念处有六十法;四正勤有六十法;七菩萨授记经有七十法;神通处等五处有一百二十五法;蕴处等五处有一百二十五法;再次提及的四圣谛有一百法;四无碍解有一百法;六佛法有一百五十法。如此合计,总共是八百五十法。与之相应,义的数量也是如此。关于言辞:在谛等三处,各有言辞一百二十种;在七授记经,有言辞四百四十种;在神通处等及蕴处等,各有言辞二百五十种;在圣谛及无碍解,各有言辞二百种;在佛法,有言辞三百种。如此总计为一千七百种言辞。关于智:在谛等三处,各有智二百四十种;在七授记经,有智二百八十种;在神通处等及蕴处等,各有智五百种;在圣谛及无碍解,各有智四百种;在佛法,有智六百种。如此总计为三千四百种智。
38. Buddhadhammavāre diyaḍḍhasatanti chakkhattuṃ pañcavīsati satañca paññāsañca honti, taddiguṇā niruttiyo taddiguṇāni ñāṇāni. Paṭisambhidādhikaraṇeti paṭisambhidādhikāre. Aḍḍhanavadhammasatānīti paṭhamaṃ vuttesu catūsu saccesu saṭṭhi, catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu saṭṭhi, catūsu sammappadhānesu saṭṭhi, sattabodhisattaveyyākaraṇesu sattati, abhiññaṭṭhādīsu pañcasu pañcavīsasataṃ, khandhaṭṭhādīsu pañcasu pañcavīsasataṃ, puna catūsu ariyasaccesu sataṃ, catūsu paṭisambhidāsu sataṃ, chasu buddhadhammesu diyaḍḍhasatanti evaṃ aṭṭhasatāni ca paññāsañca dhammā honti. Evaṃ atthāpi tattakā eva honti. Evameva saccādīsu tīsu ṭhānesu vīsasataṃ niruttiyo, sattasu veyyākaraṇesu cattārīsasataṃ niruttiyo, abhiññaṭṭhādīsu khandhaṭṭhādīsu ca aḍḍhateyyāni aḍḍhateyyāni niruttisatāni, ariyasaccesu paṭisambhidāsu ca dve dve niruttisatāni, buddhadhammesu tīṇi niruttisatānīti evaṃ niruttisahassañca sattaniruttisatāni ca honti. Evameva saccādīsu tīsu ṭhānesu cattārīsādhikāni dve dve ñāṇasatāni, sattasu veyyākaraṇesu asītiadhikāni dve ñāṇasatāni, abhiññaṭṭhādīsu khandhaṭṭhādīsu ca pañcapañcañāṇasatāni , saccesu paṭisambhidāsu ca cattāri cattāri ñāṇasatāni, buddhadhammesu cha ñāṇasatānīti evaṃ tīṇi ca ñāṇasahassāni cattāri ca ñāṇasatāni hontīti.
7. 法轮论
7. Dhammacakkakathā
1. 谛转品注释
1. Saccavāravaṇṇanā
3939. 再者,以《转法轮经》为先导而宣说的“法轮论”,是对此前未显明之义所作的注释。其中,“以苦为事者”:由于通过一次现观,苦即成为他们的所依,因此称为“以苦为事者”。为了进一步简别此苦,论师又说“以谛为事者”等。其中,“以谛为所缘”者:以谛为所缘、为依止,故称“以谛为所缘”。“以谛为行境”者:以谛为行境、为领域,故称“以谛为行境”。“为谛所摄”者:指为道谛所摄受。“属于谛”者:指隶属于道谛。“于谛中生起”者:指通过遍知苦,而在苦谛中生起。同样地,它们也就安住并确立于那一谛之中。
39. Puna dhammacakkappavattanasuttantameva pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā kathitāya dhammacakkakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha dukkhavatthukāti ekābhisamayavasena dukkhaṃ vatthu etesanti dukkhavatthukā. Tadeva dukkhaṃ visesetvā saccavatthukātiādimāha. Tattha saccaṃ ārammaṇaṃ upatthambho etesanti saccārammaṇā. Saccaṃ gocaro visayo etesanti saccagocarā. Saccasaṅgahitāti maggasaccena saṅgahitā. Saccapariyāpannāti maggasaccāyattā. Sacce samudāgatāti dukkhaparijānanena dukkhasacce samuppannā. Tathā tattheva ṭhitā patiṭṭhitā ca.
40现在,为了阐明“世尊已转法轮”中的法轮,而宣说“法轮”等词。其中,法轮有两种:证悟法轮与教说法轮。证悟法轮在菩提树下,教说法轮在仙人堕处。既转动法又是轮,故称证悟法轮;既转动轮又是法,故称教说法轮。怎么说呢?世尊在菩提树下,于圣道刹那转动了根、力、觉支、道支等种种法。而这法因为是为摧破烦恼与敌人而转动,就如攻击的轮子一般,所以也是“轮”。世尊在转动法的同时,便转动了那个轮。如此,就表达了“法即是轮”这一持业释复合词的意义。世尊坐在仙人堕处,于说法的刹那,转动了类似攻击之轮的教说之轮——因为在应调伏者的相续中,为了摧破烦恼与敌人而转动;同时,也在应调伏者的相续中转动了根、力、觉支、道支等种种法轮。如此,便表达了“法与轮两者即是法轮”这一并列复合词的意义。不过,有转动者才会有转动,因此虽说各处都用了“转动”,但应理解为是基于“转动的道理”而称之为“轮”。至于“依法而转即是法轮”等说法,当知全都是针对教说法轮而言的。
40. Idāni ‘‘pavattite ca bhagavatā dhammacakke’’ti vuttaṃ dhammacakkaṃ niddisitukāmo dhammacakkantiādimāha. Tattha duvidhaṃ dhammacakkaṃ paṭivedhadhammacakkaṃ desanādhammacakkañca. Paṭivedhadhammacakkaṃ bodhipallaṅke, desanādhammacakkaṃ isipatane. Dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti paṭivedhadhammacakkaṃ vuttaṃ, cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti desanādhammacakkaṃ. Kathaṃ? Bhagavā hi bodhipallaṅke nisinno maggakkhaṇe indriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgādibhedaṃ dhammañca pavatteti, soyeva ca dhammo kilesasattughātāya pavattanato paharaṇacakkaṃ viyāti cakkañca. Dhammaṃ pavattentoyeva bhagavā taṃ cakkaṃ pavatteti nāma. Etena dhammoyeva cakkanti kammadhārayasamāsatā vuttā hoti. Isipatane nisinno bhagavā dhammadesanakkhaṇe veneyyasantāne kilesasattughātāya pavattanato paharaṇacakkasadisaṃ desanācakkañca pavatteti, veneyyasantāne indriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgādibhedaṃ dhammacakkañca pavatteti. Etena dhammo ca cakkañca dhammacakkanti dvandasamāsatā vuttā hoti. Yasmā pana pavattake sati pavattanā nāma hoti, tasmā sabbatthāpi ‘‘pavattetī’’ti vuttaṃ, pavattanaṭṭhena pana ‘‘cakka’’nti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakkantiādīni desanādhammacakkameva sandhāya vuttānīti veditabbāni.
其中,“依法而转(dhammena pavatteti)”:由于法本身具有如实性,因此所转之轮即是法轮,这是它的含义。“以法行而转(Dhammacariyāya pavatteti)”:是指在应调伏者的相续中,为了法的利益而转动之轮,即是法轮,这是它的含义。“住于法者(Dhamme ṭhito)”等,则表明世尊是法本身、是法的主人。如经中所说:“贤友,彼世尊是知者、见者,是眼、是智、是法、是梵、是说者、转者、义的引导者、不死的施予者、法主、如来。”(中部1.203)因此,通过这些说法,表达了“法之轮”,也就是法轮的意思。“住(Ṭhito)”:以成为主体的方式而住。“确立(Patiṭṭhito)”:以不动摇的方式而确立。“得自在者(Vasippatto)”:达到自在主宰的状态。“达彼岸者(Pāramippatto)”:达到究竟。“得无所畏(Vesārajjappatto)”:达到无所畏的状态。而“令人住立于法(Dhamme patiṭṭhāpento)”等,则是着眼于应调伏者而说的。
Tattha dhammena pavattetīti yathāsabhāvattā dhammena pavattaṃ cakkanti dhammacakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammacariyāya pavattetīti veneyyasantāne dhammatthāya pavattaṃ cakkanti dhammacakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhamme ṭhitotiādīhi bhagavato dhammabhūtatā dhammassāmitā ca vuttā hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘so hāvuso, bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato’’ti (ma. ni. 1.203). Tasmā tehi dhammassa cakkanti dhammacakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ṭhitoti visayībhāvena ṭhito. Patiṭṭhitoti acalabhāvena patiṭṭhito. Vasippattoti issarabhāvaṃ patto. Pāramippattoti koṭippatto. Vesārajjappattoti visāradabhāvaṃ patto. Dhamme patiṭṭhāpentotiādīhi veneyyasantānamapekkhitvā vuttehi pana vacanehi dhammassāmitāya ca dhammatthāya cakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammaṃ sakkarontotihaādīhi dhammatthāya cakkanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo hi dhammaṃ sakkārādivasena pavatteti, so dhammatthaṃ pavatteti. Dhammaṃ sakkarontoti yathā kato so dhammo sukato hoti, evameva naṃ karonto. Dhammaṃ garuṃ karontoti tasmiṃ gāravuppattiyā taṃ garuṃ karonto. Dhammaṃ mānentoti dhammaṃ piyañca bhāvanīyañca katvā viharanto. Dhammaṃ pūjentoti taṃ apadisitvā desanāpaṭipattipūjāya pūjaṃ karonto. Dhammaṃ apacāyamānoti tasseva dhammassa sakkāragarukārehi nīcavuttitaṃ karonto. Dhammaddhajo dhammaketūti taṃ dhammaṃ dhajamiva purakkhatvā ketumiva ca ukkhipitvā pavattiyā dhammaddhajo dhammaketu ca hutvāti attho. Dhammādhipateyyoti dhammādhipatito āgato bhāvanādhammavaseneva ca sabbakiriyānaṃ karaṇena dhammādhipateyyo hutvā. Taṃ kho pana dhammacakkaṃ appaṭivattiyanti kenaci nivattetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya appaṭihatapavattitā vuttā. Tasmā so dhammo pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti vuttaṃ hoti.
信根即法,世尊转动此法:意思是,通过在应调伏者的相续中生起与道相应的信根,从而转动了名为信根之法。对其余的(根、力等)也是如此。“谛(Saccā)”:指谛智。“观(Vipassanā)与明(vijjā)”:即是道智本身。“无生智(Anuppāde ñāṇaṃ)”:指阿拉汉果上的智。此智也在应调伏者的相续中生起;并且,当知通过证悟涅槃,亦可说为转动。
Saddhindriyaṃ dhammo, taṃ dhammaṃ pavattetīti veneyyasantāne maggasampayuttasaddhindriyuppādanena taṃ saddhindriyaṃ dhammaṃ pavattetīti attho. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Saccāti saccañāṇāni. Vipassanā ca vijjā ca maggañāṇameva. Anuppāde ñāṇanti arahattaphale ñāṇaṃ. Tampi veneyyasantāne pavattetiyeva, nibbānañca paṭivedhaṃ karonto pavattetiyeva nāma.
在集转品等处,通过举出“以集为事者”、“以灭为事者”、“以道为事者”等区别性词语,而作简略说明。此处也如前所述,应依最初所说的道理来理解。
Samudayavārādīsu samudayavatthukā nirodhavatthukā maggavatthukāti visesapadaṃ dassetvā saṅkhittā. Etthāpi vuttasadisaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
对《念处转品》等的注释
2-3. Satipaṭṭhānavārādivaṇṇanā
41-42以念处与神足为前导的转品,同样依圣道刹那而说。这些地方也都是在显示了各自区别性词语之后,作简略说明。
41-42. Satipaṭṭhānaiddhipādapubbaṅgamavārāpi maggakkhaṇavasena vuttā. Tepi tattha tattha visesapadaṃ dassetvā saṅkhittāti.
8. 出世间论
8. Lokuttarakathā
《出世间论》注释
Lokuttarakathāvaṇṇanā
43接着充满出世法的《法轮论》之后,现在对《出世间论》进行前所未有的意义随释。其中,「出世间」一词的意义将在定义品中显示。「四念处」等三十七菩提分法,如其所宜,与道、果相应。这些法因具觉悟之义,故称为「菩提」;它们存在于名为「菩提」的圣者的一部分中,因此称为「菩提分」。「存在于部分中」的意思是处于资助的状态。于他们所缘上,进入并投身其中而现起的,称为「现起」;而念本身就是现起,故称「念处」。然而,由于这种念以不净、苦、无常、无我的行相来把握身、受、心、法,同时成就了去除净、乐、常、我想的作用,因此其运作有四种差别,故名「四念处」。他们以此精勤,故称为「勤」;善美的勤即是「正勤」,或者说,正确地精勤就是「正勤」。又,此勤因远离烦恼的丑陋行相而善美,因能带来利益和安乐而具有最胜的状态,或者因其成就了勤勉的状态,故称「正勤」。这是精进的同义词。此精进成就四种作用:对已生的不善予以断除,令未生的不善不生,令未生的善生起,令已生的善……
43. Idāni lokuttaradhammavatiyā dhammacakkakathāya anantaraṃ kathitāya lokuttarakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha lokuttarapadassa attho niddesavāre āvi bhavissati. Cattāro satipaṭṭhānātiādayo sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā yathāyogaṃ maggaphalasampayuttā. Te bujjhanaṭṭhena bodhīti evaṃladdhanāmassa ariyassa pakkhe bhavattā bodhipakkhiyā nāma. Pakkhe bhavattāti upakārabhāve ṭhitattā. Tesu ārammaṇesu okkantitvā pakkhanditvā upaṭṭhānato upaṭṭhānaṃ, satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāyavedanācittadhammesu panassa asubhadukkhāniccānattākāragahaṇavasena subhasukhaniccaattasaññāpahānakiccasādhanavasena ca pavattito catudhā bhedo hoti. Tasmā cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti vuccati. Padahanti etenāti padhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ padhānaṃ sammappadhānaṃ, sammā vā padahanti etenāti sammappadhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā taṃ kilesavirūpapavattavirahitato padhānañca hitasukhanipphādakaṭṭhena seṭṭhabhāvāvahanato padhānabhāvakaraṇato vāti sammappadhānaṃ. Vīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tayidaṃ uppannānuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ pahānānuppattikiccaṃ, anuppannuppannānañca kusalānaṃ uppattiṭṭhitikiccaṃ sādhayatīti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tasmā cattāro sammappadhānāti vuccati. Nipphattipariyāyena ijjhanaṭṭhena, ijjhanti etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iminā vā pariyāyena iddhi, tassā sampayuttāya pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena phalabhūtāya pubbabhāgakāraṇaṭṭhena ca iddhiyā pādoti iddhipādo. So chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāvasena catubbidhova hoti. Tasmā cattāro iddhipādāti vuccati. Assaddhiyakosajjapamādavikkhepasammohānaṃ abhibhavanato abhibhavanasaṅkhātena adhipatiyaṭṭhena indriyaṃ. Assaddhiyādīhi anabhibhavanīyato akampiyaṭṭhena balaṃ. Tadubhayampi saddhāvīriyasatisamādhipaññāvasena pañcavidhaṃ hoti. Tasmā pañcindriyāni pañca balānīti vuccanti. Bujjhanakasattassa pana aṅgabhāvena satiādayo satta dhammā bojjhaṅgā, niyyānaṭṭhena ca sammādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha maggaṅgā honti. Tena vuccati satta bojjhaṅgā ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti.
如此,这三十七菩提分法,在前行阶段的世间观现起时:以十四种方式把握身体,即是「身随观念处」;以九种方式把握感受,即是「受随观念处」;以十六种方式把握心,即是「心随观念处」;以五种方式把握法,即是「法随观念处」。在正勤方面,于此生命中,见他人先前未生、现已生起的不善,心想:'若随顺而行,便会生起;我将不随顺而行,如此,此不善便不会于我身中生起。' 为此而努力令不善不生之时,即是「第一正勤」;见自己已现行具足的不善,为断除它而努力之时,即是「第二正勤」;于此生命中,为令先前未生的禅那或观生起而努力之时,即是「第三正勤」;为使已生的善法不退失,反复令其生起之时,即是「第四正勤」。在神足方面,以欲为主导令善法生起时,即是「欲神足」;以精进为主导令善法生起时,即是「精进神足」;以心为主导令善法生起时,即是「心神足」;以观为主导令善法生起时,即是「观神足」。离开邪语之时为「正语」,离开邪业、邪命之时为「正命」等,这些都是于不同心识中获得的。
Iti ime sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyā dhammā pubbabhāge lokiyavipassanāya vattamānāya cuddasavidhena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhato ca kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, navavidhena vedanaṃ pariggaṇhato ca vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, soḷasavidhena cittaṃ pariggaṇhato ca cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, pañcavidhena dhamme pariggaṇhato ca dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Iti imasmiṃ attabhāve anuppannapubbaṃ parassa uppannaṃ akusalaṃ disvā ‘‘yathā paṭipannassa tassa taṃ uppannaṃ, na tathā paṭipajjissāmi, evaṃ me etaṃ nuppajjissatī’’ti tassa anuppādāya vāyamanakāle paṭhamaṃ sammappadhānaṃ, attano samudācārappattamakusalaṃ disvā tassa pahānāya vāyamanakāle dutiyaṃ, imasmiṃ attabhāve anuppannapubbaṃ jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā uppādetuṃ vāyamantassa tatiyaṃ, uppannaṃ yathā na parihāyati, evaṃ punappunaṃ uppādentassa catutthaṃ sammappadhānaṃ. Chandaṃ dhuraṃ katvā kusaluppādanakāle chandiddhipādo, vīriyaṃ, cittaṃ, vīmaṃsaṃ dhuraṃ katvā kusaluppādanakāle vīmaṃsiddhipādo. Micchāvācāya viramaṇakāle sammāvācā , micchākammantā, micchājīvā viramaṇakāle sammājīvoti evaṃ nānācittesu labbhanti. Catumaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitte labbhanti, phalakkhaṇe ṭhapetvā cattāro sammappadhāne avasesā tettiṃsa labbhanti. Evaṃ ekacitte labbhamānesu cetesu ekāva nibbānārammaṇā sati kāyādīsu subhasaññādipahānakiccasādhanavasena ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti vuccati. Ekameva ca vīriyaṃ anuppannuppannānaṃ anuppādādikiccasādhanavasena ‘‘cattāro sammappadhānā’’ti vuccati. Sesesu hāpanavaḍḍhanaṃ natthi.
此外,在这些法之中:
Apica tesu –
九种法各是一类;一种法分为两类;一种法分为四类、一种法分为五类;一种法分为八类、一种法分为九类。如此,它们便构成了六种分类。
Nava ekavidhā eko, dvedhātha catupañcadhā;
「九种是一类」:指欲、心、喜、轻安、舍、思、语、业、命这九种法,依欲神足等类别,各各都是单一的一项,不归入其他分类。「一种分二」:信,依根与力而分为两种。「一分为四、五种」:意谓另有一种法分为四种,还有一种法分为五种。其中,定这一项,依根、力、觉支、道支而分为四种;慧则依这四种,再加上神足的那一部分,而分为五种。「一分为八、九」:意谓另有一种法分为八种,还有一种法分为九种。念,依四念处、根、力、觉支、道支而分为八种;精进,则依四正勤、神足、根、力、觉支、道支而分为九种。这样——
Aṭṭhadhā navadhā ceva, iti chaddhā bhavanti te.
「九种是一类」:指欲、心、喜、轻安、舍、思、语、业、命这九种法,依欲神足等类别,各各都是单一的一项,不归入其他分类。「一种分二」:信,依根与力而分为两种。「一分为四、五种」:意谓另有一种法分为四种,还有一种法分为五种。其中,定这一项,依根、力、觉支、道支而分为四种;慧则依这四种,再加上神足的那一部分,而分为五种。「一分为八、九」:意谓另有一种法分为八种,还有一种法分为九种。念,依四念处、根、力、觉支、道支而分为八种;精进,则依四正勤、神足、根、力、觉支、道支而分为九种。这样——
Navaekavidhāti chando cittaṃ pīti passaddhi upekkhā saṅkappo vācā kammanto ājīvoti ime nava chandiddhipādādivasena ekavidhāva honti, aññakoṭṭhāsaṃ na bhajanti. Eko dvedhāti saddhā indriyabalavasena dvedhā ṭhitā. Atha catupañcadhāti athañño eko catudhā, añño pañcadhā ṭhitoti attho. Tattha samādhi eko indriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgavasena catudhā ṭhito, paññā tesaṃ catunnaṃ iddhipādakoṭṭhāsassa ca vasena pañcadhā. Aṭṭhadhā navadhā cevāti aparo eko aṭṭhadhā, eko navadhā ṭhitoti attho. Catusatipaṭṭhānaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgavasena sati aṭṭhadhā ṭhitā, catusammappadhānaiddhipādaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgavasena vīriyaṃ navadhāti. Evaṃ –
从各自完成功用而言,及从自性被所说而言;
当圣道生起时,所有这些法便俱时生起。
Cuddaseva asambhinnā, hontete bodhipakkhiyā; Koṭṭhāsato sattavidhā, sattatiṃsa pabhedato. Sakiccanipphādanato, sarūpena ca vuttito; Sabbeva ariyamaggassa, sambhave sambhavanti te.
如此,显示了与道果相应的三十七菩提分法之后,又将这些法收摄于道果之中,说为“四圣道及四沙门果”。“沙门性”即是沙门的状态,是为四圣道的通称;沙门性之果,即名“沙门果”。而涅槃则与所有这些(道果)并不相混。由此当知:从广说来看,依三十七菩提分、四道、四果及涅槃,共有四十六种出世间法;收摄而言,依四道、四果及涅槃,则有九种;进一步收摄,依道、果、涅槃,则有三种。当说念处等及道果为出世间法时,与之相应的触等心所法的出世间性便已一并说明。不过,此处主要是依策励之法来宣说念处等。在阿毗达摩中,于出世间法的分别解说里,与道果相应的触等法的出世间性,同样已作说明。
Evaṃ maggaphalasampayutte sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme dassetvā puna te maggaphalesu saṅkhipitvā cattāro ariyamaggā cattāri ca sāmaññaphalānīti āha. Samaṇabhāvo sāmaññaṃ, catunnaṃ ariyamaggānametaṃ nāmaṃ. Sāmaññānaṃ phalāni sāmaññaphalāni. Nibbānaṃ pana sabbehi asammissameva. Iti vitthārato sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyacatumaggacatuphalanibbānānaṃ vasena chacattālīsa lokuttaradhammā, tato saṅkhepena catumaggacatuphalanibbānānaṃ vasena nava lokuttaradhammā, tatopi saṅkhepena maggaphalanibbānānaṃ vasena tayo lokuttaradhammāti veditabbaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānādīnaṃ maggaphalānañca lokuttaratte vutte taṃsampayuttānaṃ phassādīnampi lokuttarattaṃ vuttameva hoti. Padhānadhammavasena pana satipaṭṭhānādayova vuttā. Abhidhamme (dha. sa. 277 ādayo, 505 ādayo) ca lokuttaradhammaniddese maggaphalasampayuttānaṃ phassādīnaṃ lokuttarattaṃ vuttamevāti.
“度世间”:意为超越世间。这里所有这类使用现在时态的表达,都是针对四种圣道而说。具体而言:入流道能度脱恶趣世间;一来道能度脱欲界世间的一部分;不来道能度脱整个欲界世间;阿拉汉道则能度脱色界与无色界世间。“超出世间”:意为从世间超出、升出。而“从世间”与“从世间”这两种说法,只是同一从格的不同表达形式。“正越世间”:所说的正是前面“度世间”的含义。在“度世间”一语中,并未顾及前缀词“正”的意味;而在此处的“正越世间”,则是连同前缀词“正”的含义一并宣说。“已正越世间者”:意为如同所说,已正确地超越了世间。这里所有这类使用过去时态的表达,是针对果与涅槃而说的。因为入流果等果位,正是超越了如前所述的世间而安住;而涅槃,则是恒常超越一切世间而安住。“超胜于世间”:意为比世间更为优越、殊胜。这是针对一切出世间法而说。“脱离”:意为出离、离开。“已脱离”:意为已经出离。“不住于世间”等一共十八种说法,都适用于一切出世间法。“不住”是指一切出世间法不隶属于世间。
Lokaṃ tarantīti lokaṃ atikkamanti. Sabbamidha īdisaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ cattāro ariyamagge sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sotāpattimaggo hi apāyalokaṃ tarati, sakadāgāmimaggo kāmāvacaralokekadesaṃ tarati, anāgāmimaggo kāmāvacaralokaṃ tarati, arahattamaggo rūpārūpāvacaralokaṃ tarati. Lokā uttarantīti lokā uggacchanti. Lokatoti ca lokamhāti ca tadeva nissakkavacanaṃ visesetvā dassitaṃ. Lokaṃ samatikkamantīti paṭhamaṃ vuttatthameva. Tattha upasaggatthaṃ anapekkhitvā vuttaṃ, idha saha upasaggatthena vuttaṃ. Lokaṃ samatikkantāti yathāvuttaṃ lokaṃ sammā atikkantā. Sabbamidha īdisaṃ atītakālavacanaṃ phalanibbānāni sandhāya vuttaṃ, sotāpattiphalādīni hi yathāvuttaṃ lokaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitāni, sadā nibbānaṃ sabbalokaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitaṃ. Lokena atirekāti lokato adhikabhūtā. Idaṃ sabbepi lokuttaradhamme sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nissarantīti niggacchanti. Nissaṭāti niggatā. Loke na tiṭṭhantītiādīni aṭṭhārasa vacanāni sabbalokuttaresupi yujjanti. Na tiṭṭhantīti loke apariyāpannattā vuttaṃ. Loke na limpantīti khandhasantāne vattamānāpi tasmiṃ na limpantīti attho. Lokena na limpantīti akatapaṭivedhānaṃ kenaci cittena, katapaṭivedhānaṃ akusalena appamattenapi cittena na limpantīti attho. Asaṃlittā anupalittāti upasaggena visesitaṃ.
“已解脱”:正是以不同的文词对“不染着”这一状态加以区分。因为,无论谁在何处、以何种方式不染着,他们便在那里、以那种方式成为已解脱。“从世间已解脱”等三句,是依从格而说。“已脱离系缚”:是对“已解脱”状态的进一步区分。因为,无论谁在何处、以何种方式、从何处得解脱,他们便在那里、以那种方式、从那里被称为已脱离系缚。“从世间得以清净”:意为清洗世间的尘垢后,从世间得到清净。“完全清净”:正是前文之义,以前缀词作强化与区分。“出起”:意为已超脱、已升起。“逆转”:意为反转而离开。“不执着”:意为不黏着。“不被执取”:意为不被抓住。“不被系缚”:意为不被束缚、困扰。“断除”:意为使(世间)不再生起。正如因已断除世间,“因已从世间清净”等后续说法,其实也是此意。“止息”:意为使之完全寂灭。“非道”等四个词,适用于一切出世间法。“非道”:意为这不是一条道路。“非去处”:意为这不是一个落脚点或归宿。“非境界”:
Vippamuttāti alittattameva nānābyañjanena visesitaṃ. Ye keci hi yattha yena vā alittā, te tattha tena vā vippamuttā honti. Lokā vippamuttātiādīni tīṇi nissakkavasena vuttāni. Visaññuttāti vippamuttattavisesanaṃ. Ye keci hi yattha yena yato vippamuttā, te tattha tena tato visaññuttā nāma honti. Lokā sujjhantīti lokamalaṃ dhovitvā lokā sujjhanti. Visujjhantīti tadeva upasaggena visesitaṃ. Vuṭṭhahantīti uṭṭhitā honti. Vivaṭṭantīti nivaṭṭanti. Na sajjantīti na lagganti. Na gayhantīti na gaṇhīyanti. Na bajjhantīti na bādhīyanti. Samucchindantīti appavattiṃ karonti. Yathā ca lokaṃ samucchinnattāti, tatheva ‘‘lokā visuddhattā’’tiādi vuttameva hoti. Paṭippassambhentīti nirodhenti. Apathātiādīni cattāri sabbesupi lokuttaresu yujjanti. Apathāti amaggā. Agatīti appatiṭṭhā. Avisayāti anāyattā. Asādhāraṇāti asamānā. Vamantīti uggilanti. Na paccāvamantīti vuttapaṭipakkhanayena vuttaṃ, vantaṃ puna na adantīti attho. Etena vantassa suvantabhāvo vutto hoti. Anantaradukattayepi eseva nayo. Visīnentīti vikiranti vimuccanti, na bandhantīti attho. Na ussīnentīti na vikiranti na vimuccanti. ‘‘Visinentī’’ti ‘‘na ussinentī’’ti rassaṃ katvā pāṭho sundaro. Vidhūpentīti nibbāpenti. Nasaṃdhūpentīti na ujjalanti. Lokaṃ samatikkamma abhibhuyya tiṭṭhantīti sabbepi lokuttarā dhammā lokaṃ sammā atikkamitvā abhibhavitvā ca tiṭṭhantīti lokuttarā. Sabbehipi imehi yathāvuttehi pakārehi lokuttarānaṃ lokato uttarabhāvo adhikabhāvo ca vutto hotīti.
关于力的解说的注释
Balakathāvaṇṇanā
44现在,在出世间论之后,紧接着是对以经典为开端的力论——即《出世间论》品中所含的力论——中前所未释之义进行注解。此处,先依经显示五种力,为了进一步显示其余诸力,便说“还有六十八力”等开头的语句。所有这些之所以称为“力”,皆因它们具有“不被各自的对立因素所动摇”之义。在“惭力”等词中:“惭”,即依此而对恶感到羞耻,这是“羞耻”的名称。“愧”,即依此而对恶感到畏惧,这是对恶的怖畏之名称。由内心生起者为惭,由外缘生起者为愧。以自我为主导者为惭,以世间为主导者为愧。住于羞耻自性者为惭,住于畏惧自性者为愧。惭的特征是具敬重,愧的特征是怖畏罪过、见怖畏相。正是此惭,不为无惭所动,故为惭力。正是此愧,不为无愧所动,故为愧力。不为不审察所动,故为审察力,此即审察慧。以精进为首修习七觉支时,所生起之力为修习力,这是对如是转起的四种蕴的称呼。清净的戒等为无过力。四摄事为摄力。也有读作“于摄受中有力”者。对苦与轻蔑的忍受为
44. Idāni lokuttarakathāya anantaraṃ kathitāya lokuttarakathāvatiyā suttantapubbaṅgamāya balakathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Tattha ādito suttantavasena pañca balāni dassetvā tadaññānipi balāni dassetukāmo apica aṭṭhasaṭṭhi balānītiādimāha. Sabbānipi taṃtaṃpaṭipakkhehi akampiyaṭṭhena balāni nāma honti. Hiribalantiādīsu pāpato hirīyanti etāyāti hirī, lajjāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pāpato ottappanti etenāti ottappaṃ, pāpato ubbegassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā hirī, bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ. Attādhipati hirī, lokādhipati ottappaṃ . Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitā hirī, bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ ottappaṃ. Sappatissavalakkhaṇā hirī, vajjabhīrukabhayadassāvilakkhaṇaṃ ottappaṃ. Sā eva hirī ahirikena na kampatīti hiribalaṃ. Tadeva ottappaṃ anottappena na kampatīti ottappabalaṃ. Appaṭisaṅkhānena na kampatīti paṭisaṅkhānabalaṃ. Upaparikkhaṇapaññāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vīriyasīsena satta bojjhaṅge bhāventassa uppannabalaṃ bhāvanābalaṃ. Tathāpavattānaṃ catunnaṃ khandhānametaṃ nāmaṃ. Parisuddhāni sīlādīni anavajjabalaṃ. Cattāri saṅgahavatthūni saṅgahabalaṃ. Saṅgahe balantipi pāṭho. Dukkhamānaṃ adhivāsanaṃ khantibalaṃ. Dhammakathāya paresaṃ tosanaṃ paññattibalaṃ. Adhitassa atthassa adhigamāpanaṃ nijjhattibalaṃ. Kusalesu bahubhāvo issariyabalaṃ. Kusalesu yathāruci patiṭṭhānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabalaṃ. Hiribalādīnaṃ attho mātikāpadesu byañjanavasena visesato yujjamānaṃ gahetvā vutto. Samathabalaṃ vipassanābalanti balappattā samathavipassanā eva.
在论母的释义中,先说“于无信而不动摇,故为信力”,这是点明了根本的力义,然后再以其余九种方式对此根本义加以分别详示。因为,某一法达到不动摇、具足力用的状态时,便能支撑俱生法,制伏对立的烦恼,净化作为通达之开端的戒与见,令心安住于所缘,令心明净,令心得自在并证得殊胜;由此更向上而证得更高的通达,次第证得圣道而现观诸谛,于证果时安立于灭。因此,以九种方式分别了力义。这一解说方式,也适用于精进力等其余四力。
Mātikāniddese assaddhiye na kampatīti saddhābalanti mūlabalaṭṭhaṃ vatvā tameva aparehi navahi pariyāyehi visesetvā dassesi. Yo hi dhammo akampiyo balappatto hoti, so sahajāte upatthambheti, attano paṭipakkhe kilese pariyādiyati, paṭivedhassa ādibhūtaṃ sīlaṃ diṭṭhiñca visodheti, cittaṃ ārammaṇe patiṭṭhāpeti, cittaṃ pabhassaraṃ karonto vodāpeti, vasiṃ pāpento visesaṃ adhigamāpeti, tato uttariṃ pāpento uttaripaṭivedhaṃ kāreti, kamena ariyamaggaṃ pāpetvā saccābhisamayaṃ kāreti, phalappattiyā nirodhe patiṭṭhāpeti. Tasmā navadhā balaṭṭho visesito. Esa nayo vīriyabalādīsu catūsu.
“于欲贪而惭”:与出离相应的修行者,以出离而对欲贪生起惭耻。于愧,也同理。由此二者,实已代表了对一切不善法起惭与愧的意思。对于“嗔”等,其含义也应依此方式理解。“已审察”:即依不痴,从过患的角度审察。“修习”:即增长。“应舍”:指贪等应被舍断。“摄受”:即系缚。“堪忍”:即那位修行者能忍受、觉得合适。“施设”:即令喜悦。“决择”:即令思惟。“运用自在”:即成为心的主人之后,令心随自己的意愿而转起。“决意”:即确立。修习力等一切,也就是出离等本身。虽然在论母的注释中用了不同的方式宣说,但因其含义已由字词显明,故在此不再解说,应知此意。详细解说了止力与观力之后,在结尾处说明“伴有掉举的烦恼和蕴不能动摇它”等,以及“伴有无明的烦恼和蕴不能动摇它”等,这是为了显示止力与观力的特征。
Kāmacchandaṃ hirīyatīti nekkhammayutto yogī nekkhammena kāmacchandato hirīyati. Ottappepi eseva nayo. Etehi sabbākusalehipi hirīyanā ottappanā vuttāyeva honti. Byāpādantiādīnampi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Paṭisaṅkhātīti asammohavasena ādīnavato upaparikkhati. Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti. Vajjanti rāgādivajjaṃ. Saṅgaṇhātīti bandhati. Khamatīti tassa yogissa khamati ruccati. Paññāpetīti toseti. Nijjhāpetīti cintāpeti. Vasaṃ vattetīti citte pahu hutvā cittaṃ attano vasaṃ katvā pavatteti. Adhiṭṭhātīti vidahati. Bhāvanābalādīni sabbānipi nekkhammādīniyeva. Mātikāvaṇṇanāya aññathā vutto, attho pana byañjanavaseneva pākaṭattā idha na vuttoti veditabbaṃ. Samathabalaṃ vipassanābalañca vitthārato niddisitvā avasāne uddhaccasahagatakilese ca khandhe ca na kampatītiādi ca avijjāsahagatakilese ca khandhe ca na kampatītiādi ca samathabalavipassanābalānaṃ lakkhaṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
关于有学力与无学力:“学习正见,故为有学力”的意思是:有学人修学正见,故称为有学;那正见即是彼有学者的力,故称有学力。其中,“因已学毕,故为无学力”的意思是:无学人对于正见已修学圆满,更不复学,故称无学;彼正见本身即是彼无学者的力,故称无学力。对于正思惟等,也是同样的道理。“正智”:指省察智。此智虽属世间,然于有学者生起时,故说为有学力;于无学者生起时,故说为无学力。“正解脱”:指除了八支圣道之外,其余与果相应之法。但也有些人说:“除了出世间解脱之外,其余一切解脱都是正解脱。”它作为有学力和无学力的道理,与前面所说的相同。
Sekhāsekhabalesu sammādiṭṭhiṃ sikkhatīti sekhabalanti sekhapuggalo sammādiṭṭhiṃ sikkhatīti sekho, sā sammādiṭṭhi tassa sekhassa balanti sekhabalanti attho. Tattha sikkhitattā asekhabalanti asekhapuggalo tattha sammādiṭṭhiyā sikkhitattā na sikkhatīti asekho, sāyeva sammādiṭṭhi tassa asekhassa balanti asekhabalaṃ. Eseva nayo sammāsaṅkappādīsu. Sammāñāṇanti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Tampi hi lokikampi hontaṃ sekhassa pavattattā sekhabalaṃ, asekhassa pavattattā asekhabalanti vuttaṃ. Sammāvimuttīti aṭṭha maggaṅgāni ṭhapetvā sesā phalasampayuttā dhammā . Keci pana ‘‘ṭhapetvā lokuttaravimuttiṃ avasesā vimuttiyo sammāvimuttī’’ti vadanti. Tassa sekhāsekhabalattaṃ vuttanayameva.
在漏尽者之力中,这一切也同样是智之力。经文中「漏尽比丘的」是依主释,意为「由那位漏尽比丘」。「无常故」是指以生起后又坏灭的方式而见为无常。「如实」即依照事物本来的样子。「以慧」是与观相应的道慧。由于善见了无常,以此为根本,也就善见了苦与无我。「以此」是中性词,表示修习,或表示「由于什么原因」。「依于」即缘于。「宣说」即承认、宣称。所谓「火坑喻」,是因为爱欲有极大热恼的缘故,故将其比喻为火坑。「爱欲」指所依之欲与烦恼之欲两者。
Khīṇāsavabalesu sabbānipi ñāṇabalāni. Khīṇāsavassa bhikkhunoti karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, khīṇāsavena bhikkhunāti attho. Aniccatoti hutvā abhāvākārena aniccato. Yathābhūtanti yathāsabhāvato. Paññāyāti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya. Aniccato sudiṭṭhā dukkhato anattato sudiṭṭhā honti tammūlakattā. Yanti bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ, yena kāraṇenāti vā attho. Āgammāti paṭicca. Paṭijānātīti sampaṭicchati paṭiññaṃ karoti. Aṅgārakāsūpamāti mahābhitāpaṭṭhena aṅgārakāsuyā upamitā. Kāmāti vatthukāmā ca kilesakāmā ca.
「趣向远离」:以果等至的力量,朝向那称为「依远离」的涅槃。远离有三种:身远离、心远离、依远离。身远离,为住于远离处、乐出离者所有;心远离,为致力于增上心者所有;依远离,为无依、已达诸行灭尽者所有,或指趣向那称为出离远离的涅槃。又有五种远离:镇伏远离、彼分远离、正断远离、止息远离、出离远离。「趣向远离」指心倾注于远离;「倾向远离」指心朝向远离;「偏向远离」指心以远离为最主要的所向。后二者与前一词同义。「住于远离」指远离了烦恼,或处于远离的状态。「乐出离」指乐于涅槃,或乐于出家。「彻底脱离」指已脱离一切烦恼的边际,没有丝毫黏着,完全解脱、彻底离散。「一切」是以一切方式。「从诸漏住处之法」指从那些由于相应结合而成为诸漏之因的烦恼法中彻底脱离。或者,「彻底脱离」是指离贪的状态,即没有渴爱的意思。从何处脱离?「完全彻底地从一切诸漏住处之法、一切三界诸法脱离」。在此,通过十种漏尽者之力,说明了漏尽者的世间道与出世间道。又,
Vivekaninnanti phalasamāpattivasena upadhivivekasaṅkhātanibbānaninnaṃ. Tayo hi vivekā – kāyaviveko cittaviveko upadhivivekoti. Kāyaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ nekkhammābhiratānaṃ. Cittaviveko ca adhicittamanuyuttānaṃ. Upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ visaṅkhāragatānaṃ, nissaraṇavivekasaṅkhātanibbānaninnaṃ vā. Pañca hi vivekā – vikkhambhanaviveko tadaṅgaviveko samucchedaviveko paṭippassaddhiviveko nissaraṇavivekoti. Vivekaninnanti viveke ninnaṃ. Vivekapoṇanti viveke nataṃ. Vivekapabbhāranti vivekasīsabhāraṃ. Dvepi purimasseva vevacanāni. Vivekaṭṭhanti kilesehi vajjitaṃ, dūrībhūtaṃ vā. Nekkhammābhiratanti nibbāne abhirataṃ, pabbajjāya abhirataṃ vā. Byantībhūtanti vigatantībhūtaṃ, ekadesenāpi anallīnaṃ vippamuttaṃ visaṃsaṭṭhaṃ. Sabbasoti sabbathā. Āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehīti saṃyogavasena āsavānaṃ kāraṇabhūtehi kilesadhammehīti attho. Atha vā byantībhūtanti vigatanikantibhūtaṃ, nittaṇhanti attho. Kuto? Sabbaso āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehi sabbehi tebhūmakadhammehīti attho. Idha dasahi khīṇāsavabalehi khīṇāsavassa lokiyalokuttaro maggo kathito. ‘‘Aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā’’ti dukkhapariññābalaṃ, ‘‘aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmā’’ti samudayapahānabalaṃ, ‘‘vivekaninnaṃ cittaṃ hotī’’ti nirodhasacchikiriyābalaṃ, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādi sattavidhaṃ maggabhāvanābalantipi vadanti. Dasa iddhibalāni iddhikathāya āvi bhavissanti.
在如来力的解说中,所谓「如来力」,是指与其他一切皆不共、唯独如来所有之力。或者说,如同过去诸佛凭借福德的圆满积累而获得诸力那样,如此成就之力,也有此义。其中,如来力有两种:身力与智力。此中,身力应依照象的族群来了解。古代的论师们曾这样说:
Tathāgatabalaniddese tathāgatabalānīti aññehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatasseva balāni. Yathā vā pubbabuddhānaṃ balāni puññussayasampattiyā āgatāni, tathā āgatabalānītipi attho. Tattha duvidhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ – kāyabalaṃ ñāṇabalañca. Tesu kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
黑象、恒河象、白象、红褐象、黄褐象;
香象、吉祥象、金象、布萨象、六牙象,合为十种。(《分别论注》760;《中部注》1.148;《相应部注》2.2.22)
‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 760; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.22);
这便是十种象族。其中,“黑象”应理解为普通的象族。十位男子的体力,相当于一头黑象的力。十头黑象的力,相当于一头恒河象的力。十头恒河象的力,相当于一头白象的力。十头白象的力,相当于一头红褐象的力。十头红褐象的力,相当于一头黄褐象的力。十头黄褐象的力,相当于一头香象的力。十头香象的力,相当于一头吉祥象的力。十头吉祥象的力,相当于一头金象的力。十头金象的力,相当于一头布萨象的力。十头布萨象的力,相当于一头六牙象的力。十头六牙象的力,相当于一位如来的身力。此力亦称为那罗延坚固力。若按普通象的数量计算,此力相当于千亿头象之力;若按人数计算,则相当于十万亿人之力。以上便是如来的身力。
Imāni dasa hatthikulāni. Tattha kāḷāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakassa hatthino balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kāḷāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa balaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ , taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemavatassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa balaṃ. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthino gaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassassa, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ.
而智慧力,此处指十力智——这在此处及其他经典中均有记载;还有《中部》所说的四无畏智、处于八种众中不为所动的智、善辨四生之智、善辨五趣之智,以及《相应部》所说的七十三智、七十七智等无数种类的智。这便是所谓的智慧力。此处所指,也正是智慧力。因为智不可动摇,且具有支撑义,故称为「力」。
Ñāṇabalaṃ pana idha tāva aññattha ca pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva dasabalañāṇaṃ, majjhime (ma. ni. 1.150) āgataṃ catuvesārajjañāṇaṃ, aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampanañāṇaṃ, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇaṃ, pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ, saṃyuttake (saṃ. ni. 2.33-34) āgatāni tesattati ñāṇāni, sattasattati ñāṇānīti evamaññānipi anekāni ñāṇasahassāni. Etaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ nāma. Idhāpi ñāṇabalameva adhippetaṃ. Ñāṇañhi akampiyaṭṭhena upatthambhanaṭṭhena ca balanti vuttaṃ.
「处与非处」,即从因的角度来了知何者为因、何者非因。所谓「因」,因为果依彼而存续,依彼而有生起与转起,故称为「处」。世尊如实了知:哪些法对于哪些法的生起是因、是缘,那便是他们之「处」;哪些法对于哪些法的生起并非因、并非缘,那便是他们之「非处」。如此,他如实了知处即为处,非处即为非处。其中,「以彼智」是指以此处非处智;「此」是就此种处非处智而言,对如来来说,即称为如来十力中的一种力。其余各句的衔接,也应依此理解。
Ṭhānañca ṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. Kāraṇañhi yasmā tattha phalaṃ tiṭṭhati tadāyattavuttitāya uppajjati ceva pavattati ca, tasmā ṭhānanti vuccati. Taṃ bhagavā ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānanti, ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhānanti pajānanto ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Yampīti yena ñāṇena. Idampīti idampi ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ nāma hotīti attho. Evaṃ sesapadesupi yojanā veditabbā.
「最胜位」(āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ):意思是最胜的处所、最上的处所;或者,以「āsabhā」指过去诸佛,即诸佛的地位。此外,牛群中以百牛为首的牛王,称为usabha;以千牛为首的牛王,称为vasabha。或者,统率百牛牛群的牛王称usabha,统率千牛牛群的牛王称vasabha。而在一切牛中最为殊胜、能堪忍一切危难、肤色洁白、形貌端正、能荷负重任、纵闻霹雳之声亦无所惊恐的牛王,则称为nisabha。此处以usabha作为所指,该词也是nisabha的同义词。属于usabha的,即称为āsabha。而「位」(ṭhāna),是指以四足踏地而安住。这里取「āsabha」为比喻:正如那位被称为nisabha的牛王,具足牛王之力,以四足踏地,稳固不动地站立;同样,如来也具足十种如来力,以四无畏为足,踏于八众之地上,在包含天神的整个世间中,不为任何敌手所动摇,安住于不动的地位。当他如此安住时,便能宣称、达到而无所退失,将自己置于那个最胜位之中,故说——「他自称安住于最胜位」。
Āsabhaṃṭhānanti seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ uttamaṭṭhānaṃ, āsabhā vā pubbabuddhā, tesaṃ ṭhānanti attho. Apica gavasatajeṭṭhako usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, vajasatajeṭṭhako vā usabho, vajasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, sabbagavaseṭṭho sabbaparissayasaho seto pāsādiko mahābhāravaho asanisatasaddehipi asantasanīyo nisabho, so idha usabhoti adhippeto. Idampi hi tassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ. Ṭhānanti catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā avaṭṭhānaṃ. Idaṃ pana āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ yatheva hi nisabhasaṅkhāto usabho usabhabalena samannāgato catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tathāgatopi dasahi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato catūhi vesārajjapādehi aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci paccatthikena paccāmittena akampiyo acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tiṭṭhamāno ca taṃ āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti upagacchati na paccakkhāti, attani āropeti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.22; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148).
“于众中”(parisāsu):指在刹帝利、婆罗门、居士、沙门,以及四大王天、三十三天、魔、梵天这八种大众之中。“作狮子吼”(sīhanādaṃ nadati):意思是发出最胜之吼、无所畏惧之吼,或发出与狮子吼相似的声音。此义可依《狮子吼经》加以阐明。又如狮子因能忍受、能摧破而得“狮子”之名,同样地,如来因能忍受世间法、能摧破外道之说,亦被称为狮子。如此所称的狮子所发之吼声,即是狮子吼。于其中,犹如狮子具足狮子之力,于一切处无所畏惧、毫毛不竖,发出狮子吼;同样地,如来狮子亦具足如来之力,于八众之中无所畏惧、毫毛不竖,以“这是色……”等方式,发出具足种种教说庄严的狮子吼。因此说——“于众中作狮子吼”。
Parisāsūti khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmānaṃ vasena aṭṭhasu parisāsu. Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti seṭṭhanādaṃ achambhitanādaṃ nadati, sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadati. Ayamattho sīhanādasuttena (ma. ni. 1.146 ādayo; dī. ni. 1.381 ādayo) dīpetabbo. Yathā vā sīho sahanato hananato ca sīhoti vuccati, evaṃ tathāgato lokadhammānaṃ sahanato parappavādānaṃ hananato sīhoti vuccati. Evaṃ vuttassa sīhassa nādaṃ sīhanādaṃ. Tattha yathā sīho sīhabalena samannāgato sabbattha visārado vigatalomahaṃso sīhanādaṃ nadati, evaṃ tathāgatasīhopi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato aṭṭhasu parisāsu visārado vigatalomahaṃso ‘‘iti rūpa’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.78) nayena nānāvidhadesanāvilāsasampannaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadatī’’ti.
“转梵轮”(brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti):此处,“梵”(brahma)意为最胜、最上、清净。而“轮”(cakka)一词则有——
Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetīti ettha brahmanti seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ visuddhaṃ. Cakkasaddo panāyaṃ –
用于成就、相、车轮、威仪、
此词可见于布施、宝、法、胸,以及轮等意义中;
此处,它指法轮,且此轮还应以两种方式阐明。
Sampattiyaṃ lakkhaṇe ca, rathaṅge iriyāpathe; Dāne ratanadhammūra, cakkādīsu ca dissati; Dhammacakke idha mato, tampi dvedhā vibhāvaye.
例如,在‘诸比丘!有此四轮,凡是具足它们的诸天与人……’(《增支部》4.31)等经文中,「轮」出现在‘成就’的意义上;在‘足下生有轮相……’(《长部》2.35)中,出现在‘相’的意义上;在‘如车轮随搬运者之足’(《法句经》1)中,出现在‘车轮’的意义上;在‘四轮、九门……’(《相应部》1.29)中,出现在‘威仪’的意义上;在‘你且布施、受用,莫放逸,乔萨罗主!转动轮宝’(《本生经》1.7.149)中,出现在‘布施’的意义上;在‘天界的轮宝出现……’(《长部》2.243)中,出现在‘宝轮’的意义上;在‘我所转起的轮……’(《经集》562)中,出现在‘法轮’的意义上;在‘为欲求所催迫的人,轮在头顶旋转’(《本生经》1.1.104; 1.5.103)中,出现在‘胸轮’的意义上;在‘即使以刀刃为边缘的轮……’(《长部》1.166)中,出现在‘刀轮’的意义上;在‘霹雳轮’(《长部》3.61;《相应部》2.162)中,出现在‘霹雳圈’的意义上。而在这里,这个词是指法轮。
‘‘Cattārimāni , bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussāna’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.31) hi ayaṃ sampattiyaṃ dissati. ‘‘Heṭṭhā pādatalesu cakkāni jātāni hontī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.35) ettha lakkhaṇe. ‘‘Cakkaṃva vahato pada’’nti (dha. pa. 1) ettha rathaṅge. ‘‘Catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.29) ettha iriyāpathe. ‘‘Dadaṃ bhuñja mā ca pamādo , cakkaṃ vattaya kosalādhipā’’ti (jā. 1.7.149) ettha dāne. ‘‘Dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pāturahosī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.243) ettha ratanacakke. ‘‘Mayā pavattitaṃ cakka’’nti (su. ni. 562) ettha dhammacakke. ‘‘Icchāhatassa posassa, cakkaṃ bhamati matthake’’ti (jā. 1.1.104; 1.5.103) ettha uracakke. ‘‘Khurapariyantena cepi cakkenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.166) ettha paharaṇacakke. ‘‘Asanivicakka’’nti (dī. ni. 3.61; saṃ. ni. 2.162) ettha asanimaṇḍale. Idha panāyaṃ dhammacakke mato.
而这法轮有两种:证悟智与教说智。其中,依智慧所发、能为自己带来圣果的是证悟智;依悲心所发、能为声闻弟子带来圣果的是教说智。证悟智又分“正在生起”与“已生起”两种。从出家直到阿拉汉道之间,称为“正在生起”;在证果那一刹那,称为“已生起”。又或者,从兜率天开始直到在菩提树下证得阿拉汉道之间,称为“正在生起”;在证果刹那,称为“已生起”。又或者,从燃灯佛十力开始直到阿拉汉道之间,称为“正在生起”;在证果刹那,称为“已生起”。教说智也分“正在转起”与“已转起”两种。在阿若憍陈如长老证得阿拉汉道之前,称为“正在转起”;在他证果的那一刻,称为“已转起”。此中,证悟智是出世间的,教说智是世间的。但这两种智皆不与其他修行者共有,唯佛陀能生起。因此说——“转梵轮”。
Taṃ panetaṃ dhammacakkaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti paṭivedhañāṇañca desanāñāṇañca. Tattha paññāpabhāvitaṃ attano ariyaphalāvahaṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ, karuṇāpabhāvitaṃ sāvakānaṃ ariyaphalāvahaṃ desanāñāṇaṃ. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ uppannanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi abhinikkhamanato yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ nāma, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva bodhipallaṅke arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ nāma, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Dīpaṅkaradasabalato vā paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ nāma, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Desanāñāṇampi pavattamānaṃ pavattanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi yāva aññātakoṇḍaññattherassa arahattamaggā pavattamānaṃ nāma, phalakkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāma. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, desanāñāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ. Ubhayampi panetaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ, buddhānaṃyeva orasañāṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘brahmacakkaṃ pavattetī’’ti.
“诸业造作”(kammasamādānānaṃ):指已受持并造下的善或不善业,或即业本身便是业造作。“依处、依因”(ṭhānaso hetuso):即从缘与因的角度而说。其中,趣向、所依、时间、加行是果报的处(基础);业则是因。
Kammasamādānānanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammameva vā kammasamādānaṃ. Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ceva hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ. Kammaṃ hetu.
“一切处行者”:指通往一切趣向的,亦含不往任何趣向的。“行道”:即道路。“如实了知”:谓纵有众人共杀一生,亦能如实不谬地了知——此人之思将导至地狱,彼人之思将导至畜生趣。如是,虽同一事,于善、不善思所摄的种种行道,皆能无颠倒地彻见其真实自性。
Sabbatthagāmininti sabbagatigāminiñca agatigāminiñca. Paṭipadanti maggaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ ghātentesu imassa cetanā nirayagāminī bhavissati, imassa tiracchānayonigāminīti iminā nayena ekavatthusmimpi kusalākusalacetanāsaṅkhātānaṃ paṭipattīnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ jānāti.
「多种界」:即由眼界等诸界,或由欲界等诸界而有多类之界。「种种界」:因这些界各自特征不同,故呈现为种种不同之界。「世间」:指蕴、处、界所构成的世间。「如实了知」:即如实、不颠倒地彻证每一种界的真实本质。
Anekadhātunti cakkhudhātuādīhi, kāmadhātuādīhi vā dhātūhi bahudhātuṃ. Nānādhātunti tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ vilakkhaṇattā nānappakāradhātuṃ . Lokanti khandhāyatanadhātulokaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti tāsaṃ tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhati.
「种种意乐者」:指众生因有下劣、殊胜等不同意乐,而呈现种种意乐的状况。
Nānādhimuttikatanti hīnapaṇītādiadhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvaṃ.
「其他有情」:指殊胜的有情。「其他人」:指比前者更为下劣的其他有情。或者,这两个词是同一含义,只是世尊为顺应所度化者而以两种方式表述。此处也是依世尊所说而作解释。「根之上下」:指信等诸根的殊胜与低劣,亦即它们的增长与减退。
Parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ hīnasattānaṃ. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ veneyyavasena bhagavatā dvedhā vuttaṃ. Idhāpi bhagavatā vuttanayeneva vuttaṃ. Indriyaparopariyattanti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvañca aparabhāvañca, vuddhiñca hāniñcāti attho.
「禅那、解脱、定、等至」:指初禅等四种禅那,‘内有色想观外色’等八解脱(《无碍解道》1.209),有寻有伺等三种定,以及初禅等至等九种渐次等至。「杂染」:令退失的法。「清净」:令增进殊胜的法。「出起」:指从这些禅那等中出离的缘由。在此,依‘清净也是出起,从各个定出起也是出起’(《分别论》828)的说法,这是指善巧的禅那,以及有分和果等至。因为对于禅那,较低层次的善巧禅那是较高层次禅那的近因,所以说‘清净也是出起’。而通过有分,是从一切禅那中出起;从灭尽等至则通过果等至出起。由此而说‘从各个定出起也是出起’。
Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.209) aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ. Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vodānanti visesabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vuṭṭhānanti yena kāraṇena jhānādīhi vuṭṭhahanti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ. Taṃ pana ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttaṃ paguṇajjhānañceva bhavaṅgaphalasamāpattiyo ca. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgena pana sabbajjhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, nirodhasamāpattito phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
「宿住智」、「天眼智」、「漏尽智」这三种智,前面已详细说明。
Pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuāsavakkhayañāṇāni heṭṭhā pakāsitāneva.
在此,「依漏尽」指通过阿拉汉道断尽一切烦恼。「无漏」指已远离诸漏。「心解脱与慧解脱」:此处,以「心」指与阿拉汉果相应的定,以「慧」指与该定相应的慧。应如此理解:定因离贪而称心解脱,慧因离无明而称慧解脱。世尊曾这样说:‘比丘们,他那份定即是他的定根;比丘们,他那份慧即是他的慧根。比丘们,如此,从离贪欲而有心解脱,从离无明而有慧解脱。’(《相应部》5.516; 520)而且,在此还应了知,止力为心解脱,观力为慧解脱。‘于现法’意指就在此现有之身中。‘自己以证智作证’:以卓越智慧亲自现证,不依他人而了知。‘具足’意为已证得、已完全成就。这十种力智的详细说明,应依《阿毗达摩》(《分别论》809等)所说的方法来了知。
Tattha āsavānaṃ khayāti arahattamaggena sabbakilesānaṃ khayā. Anāsavanti āsavavirahitaṃ. Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti ettha cetovacanena arahattaphalasampayutto samādhi, paññāvacanena taṃsampayuttā ca paññā vuttā. Tattha ca samādhi rāgato vimuttattā cetovimutti, paññā avijjāya vimuttattā paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘yo hissa, bhikkhave, samādhi, tadassa samādhindriyaṃ. Yā hissa, bhikkhave, paññā, tadassa paññindriyaṃ. Iti kho, bhikkhave, rāgavirāgā cetovimutti avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.516; 520). Apicettha samathabalaṃ cetovimutti, vipassanābalaṃ paññāvimuttīti veditabbaṃ. Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti adhikāya paññāya attanāyeva paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparappaccayena ñatvāti attho. Upasampajjāti adhigantvā, nipphādetvā vā. Imesaṃ pana dasannaṃ dasabalañāṇānaṃ vitthāro abhidhamme (vibha. 809 ādayo) vuttanayena veditabbo.
在此,有其他论师主张:‘所谓十力智,并非别有独立的智,它只是全知智的一种分类。’不应如此看待此事。因为十力智自是一种全然不同的智,全知智则是另一种全然不同的智。十力智只了知各自份内之事;而全知智不仅了知十力智所应知的,更了知除此之外的其余一切。在十力智中,第一智唯了知处与非处,第二智唯了知业与果报的种种差别,第三智唯了知对业的抉择,第四智唯了知诸界种种差别的原因,第五智唯了知有情的意乐与倾向,第六智唯了知诸根的利钝状况,第七智唯了知禅那等的杂染及与彼俱起的情况,第八智唯了知过去所住诸蕴的相续,第九智唯了知有情的死与结生,第十智唯了知对诸谛的决断。然而,全知智则不单了知这些,还了知比这些更为超胜的。不过,它并不执行所有那些智各自的作用。因为全知智即使作为禅那,也不能令心安止;作为神通,也不能变现种种变化;作为道,也不能断除烦恼。
Tattha paravādikathā hoti – dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiyekkaṃ ñāṇaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedoti. Na taṃ tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇañhi sakasakakiccameva jānāti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tampi, tato avasesampi jānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti, dutiyaṃ kammantaravipākantarameva, tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, catutthaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva, pañcamaṃ sattānaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca, tato uttariñca pajānāti. Etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti.
再者,应这样追问那位论师:‘这个所谓的十力智,到底是有寻有伺、无寻唯伺,还是无寻无伺?是欲界所摄、色界所摄、无色界所摄,还是世间、出世间?’如果他明了,便会回答:‘按次第说,前七智是有寻有伺的。’他接着说:‘此后的两智是无寻无伺的。’‘漏尽智,则可能是有寻有伺,可能是无寻唯伺,也可能是无寻无伺。’同样地,他还会说:‘按次第说,前七智是欲界所摄,此后的两智是色界所摄,最后的一智是出世间的。’‘而全知智,则唯是有寻有伺的,唯是欲界所摄,唯是世间的。’
Apica paravādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāmetaṃ savitakkasavicāraṃ avitakkavicāramattaṃ avitakkāvicāraṃ kāmāvacaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacaraṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttara’’nti. Jānanto ‘‘paṭipāṭiyā satta ñāṇāni savitakkasavicārānī’’ti vakkhati. ‘‘Tato parāni dve avitakkaavicārānī’’ti vakkhati. ‘‘Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ siyā savitakkasavicāraṃ, siyā avitakkavicāramattaṃ, siyā avitakkaavicāra’’nti vakkhati. Tathā ‘‘paṭipāṭiyā satta kāmāvacarāni, tato parāni dve rūpāvacarāni, tato avasāne ekaṃ lokuttara’’nti vakkhati. ‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana savitakkasavicārameva kāmāvacarameva lokiyamevā’’ti vakkhati.
如此了知未曾有意义的解释之后,现在应当知道:如来首先以处非处智,观察应调伏有情有无烦恼障——这烦恼障正是证得或不证得漏尽的处与非处——这是通过见到世间正见的立足处,以及没有决定性邪见立足处而见到的。然后,以业报智观察他们有无报障,这是通过见到三因结生而见到的。以一切处行道智观察他们有无业障,这是通过见到他们没有无间业而见到的。如此,对于无障者,为了随顺说法,以种种界智观察他们行为上的差别,这是通过见到界的种种差别而见到的。接着,以种种意乐智观察他们的意乐,即使他们尚未开始努力修行,也能随顺其意乐而说法。如此观察意乐之后,为了按照他们各自的能力与承受程度而说法,以根上下智观察他们根器的上下优劣,这是通过见到信等诸根的利与钝而见到的。即使如此周遍了知了根器的上下,但如果他们还离得很远,便以禅那等智——由于在禅那等上已得自在——以神通力特别快速地接近他们。接近之后,以宿住随念智为他们显示过去生的状况,再以凭借天眼威神力才能获得的他心智观察他们当前心的殊胜之处,最终以漏尽智的威神之力,由于对趋向漏尽的道途已全然无迷惑,便为他们说法,令他们证得。
Evamettha apubbatthānuvaṇṇanaṃ ñatvā idāni yasmā tathāgato paṭhamaṃyeva ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇena veneyyasattānaṃ āsavakkhayādhigamassa ceva anadhigamassa ca ṭhānāṭṭhānabhūtaṃ kilesāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati lokiyasammādiṭṭhiṭṭhānadassanato niyatamicchādiṭṭhiṭṭhānābhāvadassanato ca. Atha nesaṃ kammavipākañāṇena vipākāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati tihetukapaṭisandhidassanato. Sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇena kammāvaraṇābhāvaṃ passati ānantarikakammābhāvadassanato. Evaṃ anāvaraṇānaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇena anukūladhammadesanatthaṃ cariyāvisesaṃ passati dhātuvemattadassanato. Atha nesaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇena adhimuttiṃ passati payogaṃ anādiyitvāpi adhimuttivasena dhammadesanatthaṃ . Athevaṃ diṭṭhaadhimuttīnaṃ yathāsatti yathābalaṃ dhammaṃ desetuṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇena indriyaparopariyattaṃ passati saddhādīnaṃ tikkhamudubhāvadassanato. Evaṃ pariññātindriyaparopariyattāpi panete sace dūre honti, atha jhānādiñāṇena jhānādīsu vasībhūtattā iddhivisesena khippaṃ upagacchati. Upagantvā ca nesaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena pubbajātivibhāvanaṃ dibbacakkhānubhāvato pattabbena cetopariyañāṇena sampati cittavisesaṃ passanto āsavakkhayañāṇānubhāvena āsavakkhayagāminiyā paṭipadāya vigatasammohattā āsavakkhayāya dhammaṃ deseti. Tasmā iminānukkamena imāni dasa balāni vuttānīti veditabbānīti.
45如今,为从特相上说明一切力,便以“依何种义理而为信力”等提问,并以“于不信事中不可动摇的义理”等作答。其中,“知惭”等是以人为所依的开示。在从修习力至决意力等诸力中,应知“于彼处”“由彼”“彼”等,都是就出离等而言的。“由彼定而心得统一”意为:依于彼定,心得专一。“于彼处生起”意为:彼处依止寂止而相应生起,或以彼为观照对象而生起。“于彼处学”意为:于彼有学力中,有学正在修学,故称有学力。“于彼处由已学”意为:于彼无学力中,无学因已学毕,故称无学力。“由彼智而诸漏尽”意为:由彼世间与出世间的智慧令诸漏断尽,因此彼智即是漏尽者之力。因为,即使依世间智,若无观慧便无从生起出世间道,所以在世间智的层面也说诸漏灭尽。如是,“漏尽者力”即漏尽者之力。“彼成就”指神通力:在成就神通的人那里,神通得以成就,因此神通本身就是力,称为神通力。“以不可测量的意义”:因为声闻众只能部分了知处非处等,所以说“如实遍知”。
45. Idāni sabbabalāni lakkhaṇato niddisitukāmo kenaṭṭhena saddhābalantiādinā nayena pucchaṃ katvā assaddhiye akampiyaṭṭhenātiādinā nayena vissajjanaṃ akāsi. Tattha hirīyatītiādi puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā. Bhāvanābalādīsu adhiṭṭhānabalapariyantesu ‘‘tatthā’’ti ca, ‘‘tenā’’ti ca, ‘‘ta’’nti ca nekkhammādikameva sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tena cittaṃ ekagganti tena samādhinā cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha jāteti tattha samathe sampayogavasena jāte, tasmiṃ vā vipassanārammaṇaṃ hutvā jāte. Tattha sikkhatīti tattha sekhabale sekho sikkhatīti sekhabalanti attho. Tattha sikkhitattāti tattha asekhabale asekhassa sikkhitattā asekhabalaṃ. Tena āsavā khīṇāti tena lokiyalokuttarena ñāṇena āsavā khīṇāti taṃ ñāṇaṃ khīṇāsavabalaṃ . Lokiyenāpi hi ñāṇena āsavā khīṇā nāma vipassanāya abhāve lokuttaramaggābhāvato. Evaṃ khīṇāsavassa balanti khīṇāsavabalaṃ. Tassa ijjhatīti iddhibalanti tassa iddhimato ijjhatīti iddhiyeva balaṃ iddhibalaṃ. Appameyyaṭṭhenāti yasmā sāvakā ṭhānāṭṭhānādīni ekadesena jānanti, sabbākārena pajānanaṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi tīsu vijjāsu ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti na vuttaṃ, aññattha pana vuttattā tāsupi vuttameva hoti. Aññatthāti sesesu sattasu ñāṇabalesu ca abhidhamme (vibha. 760) ca dasasupi balesu. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ pana sabbathāpi sāvakehi asādhāraṇameva. Tasmā dasapi balāni sāvakehi asādhāraṇānīti. Adhimattaṭṭhena atuliyaṭṭhena appameyyāni, tasmāyeva ca ‘‘appameyyaṭṭhena tathāgatabala’’nti vuttanti.
空论解释
Suññakathāvaṇṇanā
46现在,在力论讲到出世间力结束之后,紧接着要说明以经藏为先导的空论,也就是出世间空的部分,这是对之前未说过的义理进行解释。在经文中,首先,‘atha’是一个用来承接话语的不变词,通过它,后面‘具寿’等话语才被承接起来。‘kho’则是一个用来补足语句的不变词。‘yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami’这一句里的‘yena’是处格用作具格的用法。因此,这里的义理应当这样理解:‘世尊在哪里,就往哪里去见他’。或者,应当这样理解:世尊自身因具足某种原因而为人天所应亲近,那位长老就是基于同样的原因前去亲近。那么,世尊为什么应被亲近呢?就像鸟儿们为了享用甘美的果实,会不断结出果实的大树一样,天人们为了获得种种殊胜的功德,就是基于这个原因去亲近世尊。这里的‘近赴’就是‘去’的意思。‘近赴已’则是表明‘亲近’这个动作已经完成。或者,也可以理解为‘这样去了之后,从那里再走到更靠近世尊的地方’的意思。
46. Idāni lokuttarabalapariyosānāya balakathāya anantaraṃ kathitāya lokuttarasuññatāpariyosānāya suttantapubbaṅgamāya suññatākathāya apubbatthānuvaṇṇanā. Suttante tāva athāti vacanopādāne nipāto. Etena āyasmātiādivacanassa upādānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Khoti padapūraṇatthe nipāto. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tasmā yattha bhagavā, tattha upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, teneva kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Upasaṅkamīti ca gatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evañca gato tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti.
「敬礼已」的意思是:以五体投地的方式礼敬之后。现在,为了请问自己是以什么理由前来侍奉世间最上者,他将十指合拢、光芒闪耀的双手合掌置于头顶,然后退坐一面。而「一边」是中性词,如同「日月运行不规则」等用法一样。因此,这里的意义应当这样理解:他如同退坐一面的人那样坐着。或者,这是以处格意义使用宾格。他坐下,即安坐。因为聪明的天人们去见应受尊敬者时,都懂得座位的分寸,会退坐一面,而这位长老是其中之一,所以退坐一面。
Abhivādetvāti pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā. Idāni yenaṭṭhena loke aggapuggalassa upaṭṭhānaṃ āgato, taṃ pucchitukāmo dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi patiṭṭhapetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Ekamantanti ca bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā pariharantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Tasmā yathā nisinno ekamantaṃ nisinno hoti, tathā nisīdīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Nisīdīti nisajjaṃ kappesi. Paṇḍitā hi devamanussā garuṭṭhānīyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ nisīdanti, ayañca thero tesaṃ aññataro, tasmā ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
那么,如何坐才算退坐一面呢?即远离六种坐姿的过失。这六种过失是:过远、过近、在上风处、在高处、过于正面、过于后面。坐得过远,若想说话,便须高声;坐得过近,则会造成身体触碰;坐在上风处,身体的气味会恼害对方;坐在高处,即显示不敬;坐得过于正面,若想见到对方,便要眼眼相对而视;坐得过于后面,若想见到对方,便须伸长脖颈。因此,这位长老也是远离这六种坐姿过失而坐下的,所以经文说“退坐一面”。而“这样说”的意思是:说出了这般话语。
Kathaṃ nisinno pana ekamantaṃ nisinno hotīti? Cha nisajjadose vajjetvā. Seyyathidaṃ – atidūraṃ accāsannaṃ uparivātaṃ unnatappadesaṃ atisammukhaṃ atipacchāti. Atidūre nisinno hi sace kathetukāmo hoti, uccāsaddena kathetabbaṃ hoti. Accāsanne nisinno saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karoti. Uparivāte nisinno sarīragandhena bādhati. Unnatappadese nisinno agāravaṃ pakāseti. Atisammukhā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, cakkhunā cakkhuṃ āhacca daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Atipacchā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayampi ete cha nisajjadose vajjetvā nisīdi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’ti. Etadavocāti etaṃ avoca.
“空世间、空世间,尊者,据说”这句话的意思是:在此教法中,那些依教奉行的比丘们,在各处宣说着“空世间、空世间”。由于各处多有如是言论,为摄一切他们言论,故用重叠语。以此方式说出,所有那些言论便都被含摄了。以何为量,即以什么为标准。其中,nu是一个表达疑问的不变词。以我、以我所为空,即空于如“造作者、感受者、自在主宰者”这般世间所假设的我;我既不存在,也就空于那些属于我的资具。眼等一切世间法的集合,因其坏灭的特性,故称为世间。而于此世间中,既无我、亦无我所,故说为空世间。出世间法虽亦空于我与我所,但为契合提问的语境,此处唯说世间法。复次,说空并非谓无法,而是于彼诸法中,无有我与我所的坚实存在。譬如世间说“空房子、空瓶子”时,并非说房子与瓶子不存在,而是说在那个房子或瓶子里,没有其他东西存在。世尊所说的“凡于一法中所无者,即依此而观彼为空;然于彼法中尚有残余存在者,则如实了知‘此尚存’”,正是指此义理。
Suñño loko suñño lokoti, bhante, vuccatīti imasmiṃ sāsane paṭipannehi tehi tehi bhikkhūhi ‘‘suñño loko suñño loko’’ti kathīyatīti attho. Tahiṃ tahiṃ tādisānaṃ vacanānaṃ bahukattā tesaṃ sabbesaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ āmeḍitavacanaṃ kataṃ. Evañhi vutte sabbāni tāni vacanāni saṅgahitāni honti. Kittāvatāti kittakena parimāṇena. Nu-iti saṃsayatthe nipāto. Suññaṃ attena vā attaniyena vāti ‘‘kārako vedako sayaṃvasī’’ti evaṃ lokaparikappitena attanā ca attābhāvatoyeva attano santakena parikkhārena ca suññaṃ. Sabbaṃ cakkhādi lokiyaṃ dhammajātaṃ, taṃyeva lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko nāma. Yasmā ca attā ca ettha natthi, attaniyañca ettha natthi, tasmā suñño lokoti vuccatīti attho. Lokuttaropi ca dhammo attattaniyehi suñño eva, pucchānurūpena pana lokiyova dhammo vutto. Suññoti ca dhammo natthīti vuttaṃ na hoti, tasmiṃ dhamme attattaniyasārassa natthibhāvo vutto hoti. Loke ca ‘‘suññaṃ gharaṃ, suñño ghaṭo’’ti vutte gharassa ghaṭassa ca natthibhāvo vutto na hoti, tasmiṃ ghare ghaṭe ca aññassa natthibhāvo vutto hoti. Bhagavatā ca ‘‘iti yañhi kho tattha na hoti, tena taṃ suññaṃ samanupassati. Yaṃ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti, taṃ santaṃ idamatthīti pajānātī’’ti ayameva attho vutto. Tathā ñāyaganthe ca saddaganthe ca ayameva attho. Iti imasmiṃ suttante anattalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ.
47在经分别中,先列出“空空”等与空相关的二十五个论母句,随后一一予以解释。就论母而言:首先,“空空”所指的,是那被称为空本身的空,而非由其他形容词修饰的空。因未明确指称“某个具体之空”,或仅着眼于空性本身,故此处使用了中性词。其余论母句亦然。“行空”:行相对于其他行而言,是空的。“变易空”:因老、坏灭而有变貌与变易,由于这种变易而空,即为变易空。“最上空”:这是最殊胜的,且就我、我所或相对于一切行而言,是空的。“相空”:相相对于其他相而言,是空的。“镇伏空”:指通过出离等暂时镇伏而获得的空。同样地,于“彼分空”等四种也以此类推。“内空”:是内在的,且就我、我所等而言,是空的。“外空”:是外在的,且就我、我所等而言,是空的。“双空”:内外二者,皆就我、我所等而言,是空的。“同分空”:具有共同的部分即是同分,这同分本身,且就我、我所等而言,是空的,其义为“相似空”。“异分空”:没有共同的部分即是异分,这异分本身,且就我、我所等而言,是空的,其义为“不相似空”。在某些版本中,同分空与异分空被置于……
47. Suttantaniddese suññasuññantiādīni pañcavīsati mātikāpadāni suññasambandhena uddisitvā tesaṃ niddeso kato. Tattha mātikāya tāva suññasaṅkhātaṃ suññaṃ, na aññena upapadena visesitanti suññasuññaṃ. Asukanti aniddiṭṭhattā cettha suññattameva vā apekkhitvā napuṃsakavacanaṃ kataṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Saṅkhāroyeva sesasaṅkhārehi suññoti saṅkhārasuññaṃ. Jarābhaṅgavasena virūpo pariṇāmo vipariṇāmo, tena vipariṇāmena suññaṃ vipariṇāmasuññaṃ. Aggañca taṃ attattaniyehi, sabbasaṅkhārehi vā suññañcāti aggasuññaṃ. Lakkhaṇameva sesalakkhaṇehi suññanti lakkhaṇasuññaṃ. Nekkhammādinā vikkhambhanena suññaṃ. Vikkhambhanasuññaṃ. Tadaṅgasuññādīsupi catūsu eseva nayo. Ajjhattañca taṃ attattaniyādīhi suññañcāti ajjhattasuññaṃ. Bahiddhā ca taṃ attattaniyādīhi suññañcāti bahiddhāsuññaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ attattaniyādīhi suññanti dubhatosuññaṃ. Samāno bhāgo etassāti sabhāgaṃ, sabhāgañca taṃ attattaniyādīhi suññañcāti sabhāgasuññaṃ, sadisasuññanti attho. Vigataṃ sabhāgaṃ visabhāgaṃ, visabhāgañca taṃ attattaniyādīhi suññañcāti visabhāgasuññaṃ, visadisasuññanti attho. Kesuci potthakesu sabhāgasuññaṃ visabhāgasuññaṃ nissaraṇasuññānantaraṃ likhitaṃ. Nekkhammādiesanā kāmacchandādinā suññāti esanāsuññaṃ. Pariggahasuññādīsu tīsupi eseva nayo. Ekārammaṇe patiṭṭhitattā nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvato ekattañca taṃ nānattena suññañcāti ekattasuññaṃ. Tabbiparītena nānattañca taṃ ekattena suññañcāti nānattasuññaṃ. Nekkhammādikhanti kāmacchandādinā suññāti khantisuññaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānasuññe pariyogāhanasuññe ca eseva nayo. Pariyogahanasuññantipi pāṭho. Sampajānassāti sampajaññena samannāgatassa parinibbāyantassa arahato. Pavattapariyādānanti anupādāparinibbānaṃ. Sabbasuññatānanti sabbasuññānaṃ. Paramatthasuññanti sabbasaṅkhārābhāvato uttamatthabhūtaṃ suññaṃ.
48在论母解释中,“以常空”等:由于没有任何常存之物能够超越坏灭而存在,故说以常为空。“以恒空”:即使在存在之时,也因依于众缘,而无有任何坚固之物可得,故说以恒为空。“以永恒空”:由于没有任何事物能永恒不断、于一切时中存在,故说以永恒为空。“以不变易法空”:由于没有任何事物的自性能不因老、坏灭而变易,故说以不变易法为空。虽然在经中唯说无我空,但为了在此一并显示常空与乐空,故而也宣说了“以常”等语句。因为,凡是无常的,以其具有逼迫性故,是苦;因此,当宣说常空时,实际上也就宣说了乐空。在此,应知被略说的有六组法:即色等六种外境,眼识等六种识,眼触等六种触,以及眼触所生受等六种受。
48. Mātikāniddese niccena vāti bhaṅgaṃ atikkamitvā pavattamānassa kassaci niccassa abhāvato niccena ca suññaṃ. Dhuvena vāti vijjamānakālepi paccayāyattavuttitāya thirassa kassaci abhāvato dhuvena ca suññaṃ. Sassatena vāti abbocchinnassa sabbakāle vijjamānassa kassaci abhāvato sassatena ca suññaṃ. Avipariṇāmadhammena vāti jarābhaṅgavasena avipariṇāmapakatikassa kassaci abhāvato avipariṇāmadhammena ca suññaṃ. Suttante attasuññatāya eva vuttāyapi niccasuññatañca sukhasuññatañca dassetuṃ idha niccena vātiādīnipi vuttāni. Aniccasseva hi pīḷāyogena dukkhattā niccasuññatāya vuttāya sukhasuññatāpi vuttāva hoti. Rūpādayo panettha cha visayā, cakkhuviññāṇādīni cha viññāṇāni, cakkhusamphassādayo cha phassā, cakkhusamphassajā vedanādayo cha vedanā cha saṅkhittāti veditabbaṃ.
于“福行”等词中:“福德”能净化其造作者,圆满其心愿,并能产生应受供养的福乐之生存,故名福德;它又能造作异熟果报与业生色,故名行。福德之行,即为“福行”。与福德相对的反面,就是非福德,非福德之行即是“非福行”。所谓“不动”,即是不动摇;它能造作不动之生存,故称“不动行”。福行包括由布施、持戒、修习所引生的八种欲界善思,以及唯由修习引生的五种色界善思,共计十三种思。非福行是由杀生等行为引生的十二种不善思。不动行则是唯由修习引生的四种无色界善思。将此三种行合在一起,总共有二十九种思。于“身行”等词中:由身而转起者,或是身之行,称为“身行”。“语行”与“心行”也同理可知。作此三分的解说,是为了显示在业积累的刹那,福行等是如何通过不同的门径而转起的。具体而言:先引生身表,而后从身门转起的八种欲界善思、十二种不善思以及神通思,这二十一种思被称为‘身行’。同样地,先引生语表,而后从语门转起的那二十一种思,被称为‘语行’。而所有从意门转起者,即全部的二十九种思,则被称为……
Puññābhisaṅkhārotiādīsu punāti attano kārakaṃ, pūreti cassa ajjhāsayaṃ, pujjañca bhavaṃ nibbattetīti puññaṃ, abhisaṅkharoti vipākaṃ kaṭattārūpañcāti abhisaṅkhāro, puññaṃ abhisaṅkhāro puññābhisaṅkhāro. Puññapaṭipakkhato apuññaṃ abhisaṅkhāro apuññābhisaṅkhāro. Na iñjaṃ aneñjaṃ, aneñjaṃ bhavaṃ abhisaṅkharotīti āneñjābhisaṅkhāro. Puññābhisaṅkhāro dānasīlabhāvanāvasena pavattā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā, bhāvanāvaseneva pavattā pañca rūpāvacarakusalacetanāti terasa cetanā honti, apuññābhisaṅkhāro pāṇātipātādivasena pavattā dvādasa akusalacetanā, āneñjābhisaṅkhāro bhāvanāvaseneva pavattā catasso arūpāvacaracetanāti tayopi saṅkhārā ekūnatiṃsa cetanā honti. Kāyasaṅkhārotiādīsu kāyato vā pavatto, kāyassa vā saṅkhāroti kāyasaṅkhāro. Vacīsaṅkhāracittasaṅkhāresupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ tiko kammāyūhanakkhaṇe puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ dvārato pavattidassanatthaṃ vutto. Kāyaviññattiṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā hi kāyadvārato pavattā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā, dvādasa akusalacetanā, abhiññācetanā cāti ekavīsati cetanā kāyasaṅkhāro nāma, tā eva ca vacīviññattiṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā vacīdvārato pavattā vacīsaṅkhāro nāma, manodvāre pavattā pana sabbāpi ekūnatiṃsa cetanā cittasaṅkhāro nāma. Atītā saṅkhārātiādīsu sabbepi saṅkhatadhammā sakakkhaṇaṃ patvā niruddhā atītā saṅkhārā, sakakkhaṇaṃ appattā anāgatā saṅkhārā, sakakkhaṇaṃ pattā paccuppannā saṅkhārāti.
在显示了变易空的现在法之后,由于其变易容易说明,所以首先显示了现在法。其中,“已生的色”即现在色。“以自性空”:此处“自性”即“自有之存在”,意思是“自己本身即生起”。或者,“自性”是“实有的存在”,意思也是“从自体而生起”。由于依缘而转,若无有缘,则此中并无自己本身的存在、或从自而来的存在,因此说“以自性空”,即空于自己本身的存在,或空于从自而来的存在。或者,“自性”即“自有之存在”。因为在如地界等众多色法、非色法中,每一个法相对于其他法而称为“自己的”。而“存在”是法的同义词。对于一个法,并没有另一个称为“存在”的法,所以它空于自己以外的其他存在,意思是“自己的”空于其他存在。由此说明了每一个法的单一自性。或者,“以自性空”即空是以空的自性而空。这是什么意思呢?这是说,它唯以空空而空,并非以其他同义的空而空。
Vipariṇāmasuññe paccuppannaṃ dassetvā tassa tassa vipariṇāmo sukhena vattuṃ sakkāti paṭhamaṃ paccuppannadhammā dassitā. Tattha jātaṃ rūpanti paccuppannaṃ rūpaṃ. Sabhāvena suññanti ettha sayaṃ bhāvo sabhāvo, sayameva uppādoti attho. Sato vā bhāvo sabhāvo, attatoyeva uppādoti attho. Paccayāyattavuttittā paccayaṃ vinā sayameva bhāvo, attato eva vā bhāvo etasmiṃ natthīti sabhāvena suññaṃ, sayameva bhāvena, attato eva vā bhāvena suññanti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā sakassa bhāvo sabhāvo. Pathavīdhātuādīsu hi anekesu rūpārūpadhammesu ekeko dhammo paraṃ upādāya sako nāma. Bhāvoti ca dhammapariyāyavacanametaṃ. Ekassa ca dhammassa añño bhāvasaṅkhāto dhammo natthi, tasmā sakassa aññena bhāvena suññaṃ, sako aññena bhāvena suññoti attho. Tena ekassa dhammassa ekasabhāvatā vuttā hoti. Atha vā sabhāvena suññanti suññasabhāveneva suññaṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Suññasuññatāya eva suññaṃ, na aññāhi pariyāyasuññatāhi suññanti vuttaṃ hoti.
若有人这样说:“自有之存在即是自性,以彼自性为空。”这是指什么意思呢?“存在”即是法,它相对于其他,被“自己”一词所限定,便称为自性。由于任何法都不存在,所以说“已生的色,以自性空”,便是在说色不存在。这样一来,便与“已生的色”这句话相违。因为没有生起的东西,不称为“已生的”。涅槃没有生起,不称为“已生的”;生、老、死也没有生起,它们也不称为“已生的”。正是因此,在此经中,并未摘取出“已生的生以自性空,已生的老死以自性空”这样的说法,而只以“有”作为终点来宣说。如果无生起的东西也可称为“已生的”,那就应该说“已生的生,已生的老死”。然而,在无生的生与老死当中,并未使用“已生的”一词,因此,“以自性空,不存在”的说法——因为不存在的东西没有生起——便与“已生的”一词相违。而且,对于不存在的东西说“空”,既与前面所说的世间言说相违,也与世尊的教说相违,又与正理、词典的说法相违,并以众多道理相违背,因此那样的言论应当像垃圾一样被舍弃。世尊说:“诸比丘,世间……”
Sace pana keci vadeyyuṃ ‘‘sako bhāvo sabhāvo, tena sabhāvena suñña’’nti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Bhāvoti dhammo, so paraṃ upādāya sapadena visesito sabhāvo nāma hoti. Dhammassa kassaci avijjamānattā ‘‘jātaṃ rūpaṃ sabhāvena suñña’’nti rūpassa avijjamānatā vuttā hotīti. Evaṃ sati ‘‘jātaṃ rūpa’’ntivacanena virujjhati. Na hi uppādarahitaṃ jātaṃ nāma hoti. Nibbānañhi uppādarahitaṃ, taṃ jātaṃ nāma na hoti, jātijarāmaraṇāni ca uppādarahitāni jātāni nāma na honti. Tenevettha ‘‘jātā jāti sabhāvena suññā , jātaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ sabhāvena suñña’’nti evaṃ anuddharitvā bhavameva avasānaṃ katvā niddiṭṭhaṃ. Yadi uppādarahitassāpi ‘‘jāta’’ntivacanaṃ yujjeyya, ‘‘jātā jāti, jātaṃ jarāmaraṇa’’nti vattabbaṃ bhaveyya. Yasmā uppādarahitesu jātijarāmaraṇesu ‘‘jāta’’ntivacanaṃ na vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘‘sabhāvena suññaṃ avijjamāna’’nti vacanaṃ avijjamānassa uppādarahitattā ‘‘jāta’’ntivacanena virujjhati. Avijjamānassa ca ‘‘suñña’’ntivacanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttena lokavacanena ca bhagavato vacanena ca ñāyasaddaganthavacanena ca virujjhati, anekāhi ca yuttīhi virujjhati, tasmā taṃ vacanaṃ kacavaramiva chaḍḍitabbaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ, bhikkhave, atthisammataṃ loke paṇḍitānaṃ, ahampi taṃ atthīti vadāmi. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, natthisammataṃ loke paṇḍitānaṃ, ahampi taṃ natthīti vadāmi. Kiñca, bhikkhave, atthisammataṃ loke paṇḍitānaṃ, yamahaṃ atthīti vadāmi? Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ atthisammataṃ loke paṇḍitānaṃ, ahampi taṃ atthīti vadāmī’’tiādīhi (saṃ. ni. 3.94) anekehi buddhavacanappamāṇehi anekāhi ca yuttīhi dhammā sakakkhaṇe vijjamānā evāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
“已消失的色”指已经生起、达到坏灭而灭尽的过去色。“既是变易的,又是空的”:由于老与坏灭而成为变异,称为变易;而现在法才有变易存在,过去法则无有变易,所以也以那种变易而空,这是其含义。在“已生的受”等当中,道理也是一样。然而,生与老死并非完成法,不能以自性而获得,因此在此不适用,所以舍弃了“已生的生,已生的老死”这两种理趣,唯以“有”等理趣为终点而确立。
Vigataṃ rūpanti uppajjitvā bhaṅgaṃ patvā niruddhaṃ atītaṃ rūpaṃ. Vipariṇatañceva suññañcāti jarābhaṅgavasena virūpaṃ pariṇāmaṃ pattañca vattamānasseva vipariṇāmasabbhāvato atītassa vipariṇāmābhāvato tena vipariṇāmena suññañcāti attho. Jātā vedanātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Jātijarāmaraṇaṃ pana anipphannattā sakabhāvena anupalabbhanīyato idha na yujjati, tasmā ‘‘jātā jāti, jātaṃ jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādike dve naye pahāya bhavādikameva nayaṃ pariyosānaṃ katvā ṭhapitaṃ.
“最上”(agga):处于顶端的。“最妙”(seṭṭha):极受赞叹的。“殊胜”(visiṭṭha):最超越的。也有读作“viseṭṭha”的。这三者皆表可赞叹义。涅槃依正行道而应行,故称为“处”(pada)。什么叫做“此”(yadidaṃ)?“此”即指现在要说的涅槃,以之指称。因为依于涅槃,才有一切行的止息;才有蕴依、烦恼依、行依、爱乐功德依等诸依的舍离;才有渴爱的尽、离贪、灭,故说涅槃是“一切行的止息、一切依的舍离、渴爱的尽、离贪、灭”。由“涅槃”一词,便回归到了自性相上。
Agganti agge bhavaṃ. Seṭṭhanti ativiya pasaṃsanīyaṃ. Visiṭṭhanti atisayabhūtaṃ. Viseṭṭhantipi pāṭho. Tidhāpi pasatthaṃ nibbānaṃ sammāpaṭipadāya paṭipajjitabbato padaṃ nāma. Yadidanti yaṃ idaṃ. Idāni vattabbaṃ nibbānaṃ nidasseti. Yasmā nibbānaṃ āgamma sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ samatho hoti, khandhūpadhikilesūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhikāmaguṇūpadhisaṅkhātānaṃ upadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggo hoti, taṇhānaṃ khayo virāgo nirodho ca hoti, tasmā sabbasaṅkhārasamatho sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggotaṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodhoti vuccati. Nibbānanti sabhāvalakkhaṇena nigamitaṃ.
在诸相当中,曾这样说:“比丘们,愚人有三种愚人相、愚人征、愚人行。哪三种呢?比丘们,此处,愚人是思恶思者、说恶说者、行恶行者。比丘们,这些就是愚人的三种愚人相、愚人征、愚人行。”“愚人相”:由智者以此“这是愚人”而了知,故有此三种愚人相。又说:“比丘们,智者有三种智者相、智者征、智者行。哪三种呢?比丘们,此处,智者是思善思者、说善说者、行善行者。比丘们,这些就是智者的三种智者相、智者征、智者行。”“智者相”:由智者以此“这是智者”而了知,故有此三种智者相。
Lakkhaṇesu hi ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, bālassa bālalakkhaṇāni bālanimittāni bālāpadānāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Idha, bhikkhave, bālo duccintitacintī ca hoti dubbhāsitabhāsī ca dukkaṭakammakārī ca. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, tīṇi bālassa bālalakkhaṇāni bālanimittāni bālāpadānānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.3; ma. ni. 3.246) vuttaṃ. Paṇḍitehi bālassa bāloti sallakkhaṇato tividhaṃ bālalakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa paṇḍitalakkhaṇāni paṇḍitanimittāni paṇḍitāpadānāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Idha, bhikkhave, paṇḍito sucintitacintī ca hoti subhāsitabhāsī ca sukatakammakārī ca. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, tīṇi paṇḍitassa paṇḍitalakkhaṇāni paṇḍitanimittāni paṇḍitāpadānānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.3; ma. ni. 3.253) vuttaṃ. Paṇḍitehi paṇḍitassa paṇḍitoti sallakkhaṇato tividhaṃ paṇḍitalakkhaṇaṃ.
又曾这样说:“比丘们,有三种有为的有为相。哪三种呢?生起被了知,坏灭被了知,住立者的变异性被了知。比丘们,这些就是三种有为的有为相。”(《增支部》3.47-48)生起本身就是有为,以此为相,故称“有为相”。其余二者也应如此理解其义。由此显示:在生起的刹那,其余二相不存在;在住的刹那,其余二相不存在;在坏灭的刹那,其余二相也不存在。然而,在该经中以略说方式提到“生”与“老死”的生起等相时,由于变易空而弃舍了生老死,唯以“有终”的道理说之,这便与说“生起等”、“不生起等”的时机相违。但因为它们落入了“相之流”,故应知是作为“流中落者”而记下的。正如在《阿毗达摩》(《法集论》562-565)中,于无因异熟意界、意识界的摄集品里虽亦可获得禅支,却说它们“落入五识之流而不取出”一样,此处也应知是“流中落者”。或者,也可以这样理解:如同在“从无常随观生老死”等(《无碍解道》1.73; 2.4)中,将有生老死的诸行的生起等,视为它们的相而说。
‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, saṅkhatassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyati. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, tīṇi saṅkhatassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.47-48) vuttaṃ. Uppādo eva saṅkhatamiti lakkhaṇanti saṅkhatalakkhaṇaṃ. Evamitaradvayepi attho veditabbo. Iminā uppādakkhaṇe sesadvinnaṃ, ṭhitikkhaṇe sesadvinnaṃ, bhaṅgakkhaṇe ca sesadvinnaṃ abhāvo dassito. Yaṃ panettha peyyālamukhena jātiyā ca jarāmaraṇassa ca uppādādilakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vipariṇāmasuññatāya jātijarāmaraṇāni hitvā bhavapariyosānasseva nayassa vacanena ca uppādādīnaṃ uppādādiavacanasamayena ca virujjhati. Lakkhaṇasote patitattā pana sotapatitaṃ katvā likhitanti veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca abhidhamme (dha. sa. 562-565) ahetukavipākamanodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ saṅgahavāre labbhamānampi jhānaṅgaṃ pañcaviññāṇasote patitvā gatanti na uddhaṭanti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpi sotapatitatā veditabbā. Atha vā jātijarāmaraṇavantānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ uppādādayo ‘‘jātijarāmaraṇaṃ aniccato’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.73; 2.4) viya tesaṃ viya katvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“以出离故,欲贪已被镇伏且为空”:即由出离镇伏了欲贪,且因出离在彼处并不存在,故亦以那名为镇伏的出离而说为空。对其余诸项,亦应如此结合。在此,就彼分断与正断而言,依彼分及正断所断者,皆已远远除去,故以“远除”之义,仍用“镇伏”一词来表述。
Nekkhammenakāmacchando vikkhambhito ceva suñño cāti kāmacchando nekkhammena vikkhambhito ceva nekkhammassa tattha abhāvato teneva vikkhambhanasaṅkhātena nekkhammena suñño ca. Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Tadaṅgappahānasamucchedappahānesupi cettha tadaṅgavasena ca samucchedavasena ca pahīnaṃ dūrīkatameva hotīti iminā dūrīkaraṇaṭṭhena vikkhambhanaṃ vuttaṃ.
“以出离故,欲贪以彼分空”:即由出离断除了欲贪,故欲贪依彼名为出离的支分而空。或者,任何欲贪,由于出离于彼处不存在,故欲贪即以出离这一支分而空。对其余诸项,亦应如此结合。此处,唯依各各支分在各自之处的不存在,而依近行定、安止定及观,宣说了彼分空。然而,因为并未说明断除的言辞,故以坏灭随观为终点而说为观,并未宣说四种道。于“以出离故,欲贪已被正断且为空”等句中,亦应依镇伏中所述之理来解了其义。在此,由于被彼分与镇伏所断的诸法不再现起,故亦可说名为“正断”;因此,即依此同义而说正断。或者,也可理解为依与道相应的出离等,由各各履行其正断的作用而说。于安息空与出离空中,亦应依此处所说之理来理解其义。而在此处彼分、镇伏与正断的断除中,唯取“仅是安息的状态”及“仅是出离的状态”而说。于此五种空中,出离等自身即以镇伏、彼分、正断、安息、出离之名而说。“内”:即作为内部的。“外”:即作为外部的。“俱空”:两者俱空。因为在“自内”等词中,亦有带“to”的用法。
Nekkhammenakāmacchando tadaṅgasuññoti nekkhammena pahīno kāmacchando tena nekkhammasaṅkhātena aṅgena suñño. Atha vā yo koci kāmacchando nekkhammassa tattha abhāvato nekkhammena tena aṅgena suñño. Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Tassa tassa aṅgassa tattha tattha abhāvamatteneva cettha upacārappanājhānavasena ca vipassanāvasena ca tadaṅgasuññatā niddiṭṭhā. Pahānadīpakassa vacanassa abhāvena pana vivaṭṭanānupassanaṃyeva pariyosānaṃ katvā vipassanā niddiṭṭhā, cattāro maggā na niddiṭṭhā. Nekkhammena kāmacchando samucchinno ceva suñño cātiādīsu vikkhambhane vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanavasena pahīnānipi cettha samudācārābhāvato samucchinnāni nāma hontīti iminā pariyāyena samucchedo vutto, taṃtaṃsamucchedakiccasādhanavasena vā maggasampayuttanekkhammādivasena vuttantipi veditabbaṃ. Paṭippassaddhinissaraṇasuññesu ca idha vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapahānesu panettha paṭippassaddhimattattaṃ nissaṭamattattañca gahetvā vuttaṃ. Pañcasupi etesu suññesu nekkhammādīniyeva vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇanāmena vuttāni. Ajjhattanti ajjhattabhūtaṃ. Bahiddhāti bahiddhābhūtaṃ. Dubhatosuññanti ubhayasuññaṃ. Paccattādīsupi hi to-itivacanaṃ hotiyeva.
六内处等,因与六内处等有着相同的状态,故为同类,而与其他类别不同。于“识身”等词中,以“身”一词所指的即是识等本身。于“出离寻求”等中,出离等本身是那些希求者、有智者所寻求的,故称为“寻求”。或者,也可以这样说:在前分位,对出离等的寻求亦是以欲贪等而空,何况出离等本身呢?于“摄受”等中,出离等本身在前分位被寻求,在后分位被摄受,故称为“摄受”;被摄受后,通过获得而得,故称为“获得”;获得之后,通过智慧而证得,故称为“证得”。对于一性空与异性空,仅是同时发问;在解答了一性空之后,对异性空未加解答便作了总结。为何不解答呢?因为在诸如此处所述的同义方式中,其结合方式已可了知,故不必解答。此处应如此结合:出离是一性,欲贪是异性,欲贪是异性,以出离这一性而空。对其余诸项,亦应如此结合。
Cha ajjhattikāyatanādīni chaajjhattikāyatanādīnaṃ bhāvena sabhāgāni. Parehi visabhāgāni. Viññāṇakāyātiādīsu cettha kāyavacanena viññāṇādīniyeva vuttāni. Nekkhammesanādīsu nekkhammādīniyeva tadatthikehi viññūhi esīyantīti esanā. Atha vā pubbabhāge nekkhammādīnaṃ esanāpi kāmacchandādīhi suññā, kiṃ pana nekkhammādīnītipi vuttaṃ hoti? Pariggahādīsu nekkhammādīniyeva pubbabhāge esitāni aparabhāge pariggayhantīti pariggahoti, pariggahitāni pattivasena paṭilabbhantīti paṭilābhoti, paṭiladdhāni ñāṇavasena paṭivijjhīyantīti paṭivedhoti ca vuttāni. Ekattasuññañca nānattasuññañca sakiṃyeva pucchitvā ekattasuññaṃ vissajjetvā nānattasuññaṃ avissajjetvāva sakiṃ nigamanaṃ kataṃ. Kasmā na vissajjitanti ce? Vuttapariyāyenevettha yojanā ñāyatīti na vissajjitanti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – nekkhammaṃ ekattaṃ, kāmacchando nānattaṃ, kāmacchando nānattaṃ, nekkhammekattena suññanti. Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā veditabbā.
在“忍”等中,出离等本身因能忍受、能喜好而称为“忍”;因喜好而进入并安住,故称“决意”;因进入安住后随其所好而修习,故称“深入”。此处,“具正知”等对胜义空的解说,在般涅槃智的解说中已作说明。
Khantiādīsu nekkhammādīniyeva khamanato ruccanato khantīti, rocitāniyeva pavisitvā tiṭṭhanato adhiṭṭhānanti, pavisitvā ṭhitānaṃ yathārucimeva sevanato pariyogāhananti ca vuttāni. Idhasampajānotiādiko paramatthasuññaniddeso parinibbānañāṇaniddese vaṇṇitoyeva.
于这一切空中,说“行空”“变坏空”与“相空”,是为了显示前述诸法彼此不相混杂。若说“不善分以善分而空”,是为了显示不善的过患;若说“善分以不善分而空”,是为了显示善的功德;若说“我、我所等空”,是为了于一切行中生起厌离;若说“最上空”与“胜义空”,则是为激发对涅槃的策励精进。应如此理解。
Imesu ca sabbesu suññesu saṅkhārasuññaṃ vipariṇāmasuññaṃ lakkhaṇasuññañca yathāvuttānaṃ dhammānaṃ aññamaññaasammissatādassanatthaṃ. Yattha pana akusalapakkhikānaṃ kusalapakkhikena suññatā vuttā, tena akusale ādīnavadassanatthaṃ. Yattha pana kusalapakkhikānaṃ akusalapakkhikena suññatā vuttā, tena kusale ānisaṃsadassanatthaṃ. Yattha attattaniyādīhi suññatā vuttā, taṃ sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbidājananatthaṃ. Aggasuññaṃ paramatthasuññañca nibbāne ussāhajananatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
其中,最上空与胜义空——此二空在意义上其实同为一涅槃,只是依最上与胜义的角度,及依有余与无余的角度,而分为两种来说。此二空与“我、我所空”及“行空”相类似。“空空、内空、外空、双空、同类空、异类空”此六种空,实际只是“空空”本身,但依内等差别而说为六种。而这六种亦与“我、我所等空”相类似。行空、变坏空、相空;镇伏空、彼分空、断空、止息空、出离空;寻求空、执取空、获得空、通达空;一性空、异性空;忍空、决意空、深入空——这十七种空,是依据自身中不存在的那些种种法而空,从这些法不存在的角度,各自分别予以宣说。然而,行空、变坏空、相空,由于彼此不相混杂,而与其余的空相类似;镇伏等五种,由于以善分而空,故相类似;寻求等四种、忍等三种,由于以不善分而空,故相类似;一性空与异性空,由于相互对立,而与其余的空相类似。
Tesu aggasuññañca paramatthasuññañcāti dve suññāni atthato ekameva nibbānaṃ aggaparamatthavasena saupādisesaanupādisesavasena ca dvidhā katvā vuttaṃ. Tāni dve attattaniyasuññato saṅkhārasuññato ca sabhāgāni. ‘‘Suññasuññaṃ ajjhattasuññaṃ bahiddhāsuññaṃ dubhatosuññaṃ sabhāgasuññaṃ visabhāgasuñña’’nti imāni cha suññāni suññasuññameva hoti. Ajjhattādibhedato pana chadhā vuttāni. Tāni cha ca attattaniyādisuññato sabhāgāni. Saṅkhāravipariṇāmalakkhaṇasuññāni, vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇasuññāni, esanāpariggahapaṭilābhapaṭivedhasuññāni, ekattanānattasuññāni, khantiadhiṭṭhānapariyogāhanasuññāni cāti sattarasa suññāni attani avijjamānehi tehi tehi dhammehi suññattā avijjamānānaṃ vasena visuṃ visuṃ vuttāni. Saṅkhāravipariṇāmalakkhaṇasuññāni pana itarena itarena asammissavasena sabhāgāni, vikkhambhanādīni pañca kusalapakkhena suññattā sabhāgāni, esanādīni cattāri, khantiādīni ca tīṇi akusalapakkhena suññattā sabhāgāni, ekattanānattasuññāni aññamaññapaṭipakkhavasena sabhāgāni.
Sabbe dhammā samāsena, tidhā dvedhā tathekadhā; Suññāti suññatthavidū, vaṇṇayantīdha sāsane.
如何解释呢?首先,一切世间法,由于远离恒常、清净、乐、我,故为恒常空、清净空、乐空、我空。道果法由于远离恒常、乐、我,故为恒常空、乐空、我空;以其无常,故亦是乐空;以其无漏,故非清净空。涅槃法因自我本不存在,故为我空。再者,一切世间与出世间的有为法,由于没有任何众生存在,故为众生空。无为的涅槃法,由于那些行也不存在,故为行空。而一切有为法、无为法,由于名为“我”的补特伽罗并不存在,故为我空。
Kathaṃ? Sabbe tāva lokiyā dhammā dhuvasubhasukhaattavirahitattā dhuvasubhasukhaattasuññā. Maggaphaladhammā dhuvasukhattavirahitattā dhuvasukhattasuññā. Aniccattāyeva sukhena suññā. Anāsavattā na subhena suññā. Nibbānadhammo attasseva abhāvato attasuñño. Lokiyalokuttarā pana sabbepi saṅkhatā dhammā sattassa kassaci abhāvato sattasuññā. Asaṅkhato nibbānadhammo tesaṃ saṅkhārānampi abhāvato saṅkhārasuñño. Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatā pana sabbepi dhammā attasaṅkhātassa puggalassa abhāvato attasuññāti.